JP2016067498A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of favorably enhancing a player's attention degree to a game.SOLUTION: When a game ball enters an upper operation-start hole 33 or a lower operation-start hole 34, reservation information is stored in a main control device. The main control device executes a win/loss lottery of whether or not to transfer to an opening/closing execution mode on the basis of the reservation information and, when the lottery is won, transfers to the opening/closing execution mode. Performance control device controls a symbol display device to execute a game-round performance in association with the win/loss lottery of the main control device side. Further, a Pachinko machine sometimes executes a special reservation forenotice, and sets a special condition in which an establishment probability may be differentiated according to the length of a period when the special reservation forenotice is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 2

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a winning gaming state triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into a starting pitching portion provided in the gaming area Done. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the display of the variation of the picture is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and a stop result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in the final stop display of the variation display. A display effect for one game time that is displayed is executed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2004-81853 A

  Here, in gaming machines, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to games, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

The invention described in claim 1
Information acquisition means for acquiring information for grant determination based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Based on the information for determination of grant acquired by the information acquisition means, grant determination means for determining whether to grant the player a first privilege;
A first effect setting means for setting a first effect performed by a predetermined notification means based on the grant determination by the grant determination means;
First effect execution means for executing the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
A first privilege granting unit for granting the first privilege based on the grant determination by the grant determination unit;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means;
Condition setting means for setting a special condition in which the establishment probability may vary depending on the length of the period during which the second effect is performed;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the present invention, the degree of attention to a game can be suitably increased.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a fluctuation | variation display time. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a fluctuation | variation display time table. It is a flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process after opening / closing execution mode completion | finish. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of an effect control apparatus and a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for the reservation notice in MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a pending | holding command. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding display control command corresponding | compatible process in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a hold notice and a special hold notice. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relevance of an effect pattern and the image for a hold display. It is a flowchart which shows a special reservation advance notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the holding | maintenance information grasping | ascertainment process. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation setting process at the time of time specification possible. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various tables for special reservation notice. It is a flowchart which shows the timer input process at the time of a normal pattern. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various tables for special reservation notice. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various tables for special reservation notice. It is a flowchart which shows the timer input process at the time of a time specific pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the timer input process at the time of a premier pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of time specification impossible. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation setting process at the time of removal. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various tables for special reservation notice. It is a flowchart which shows the special reservation notice control process in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a timer management process. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process at the time of a shift. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a pending | holding display. It is a flowchart which shows the change display control process in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special reservation notices. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process at the time of shift in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various tables for special reservation notice. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the fluctuation | variation display time in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a fluctuation | variation display time table. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding control command response process. It is a flowchart which shows a special reservation advance notice setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the fluctuation | variation display time table in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command response process for pending | holding control in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process at the time of a shift. It is a flowchart which shows the timer management process in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a subtraction value adjustment process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary for special reservation notice. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary for special reservation notice in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the operation corresponding | compatible process in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary for special reservation notice in the modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the operation corresponding | compatible subtraction process in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for the success or failure lottery etc. in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a data setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification for special reservation notices.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown), a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame, and a back pack unit (not shown) arranged behind the inner frame.

  The inner frame of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions serving as a support side. Further, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and can be rotated forward by using one of the left and right side portions as a support side. Further, the back pack unit is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and can be rotated rearward with one of the left and right side portions as a support side.

  Note that the gaming machine body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. In addition, the front door frame 14 has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  A game board 24 is mounted on the inner frame. Here, the structure of the game board 24 is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 24.

  The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port 33, a lower operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a main display unit 43, an accessory display unit 44, and the like. ing.

  When a ball enters the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, and the lower operating port 34, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the game board 24, Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out.

  In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 37. The game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 38 in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill are provided.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 37, the game ball enters the variable winning device 32, the upper operation port 33, the lower operation port 34, or the through gate 35. Is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and are installed in the game board 24. Both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 33 is on the upper side. The lower working port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) of the electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot win the lower operating port 34, and the electric operating member 34a is in the open state (supported state or guide state). It is possible to win 34.

  The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an open / close door 32b that opens and closes the large winning opening 32a. The open / close door 32b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win, and a predetermined game ball is likely to win when winning the opening / closing execution mode (open / close execution state) in the internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state. Here, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a big win is won. The opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail later. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 32, the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is an embodiment.

  The main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 are provided on a decorative member 39 disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 39 extends from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is narrower than that of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

  A main display unit 43 and an accessory display unit 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 39. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and a game ball is in front of both the display units 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling.

  In the main display unit 43, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning at the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 is achieved. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the display is clearly shown. In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, the winning to the upper working port 33 and the winning to the lower working port 34 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and are performed based on the winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. The result of the internal lottery is displayed on the main display unit 43 which is a common display area. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the main display unit 43. After the display and the change display are stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The main display unit 43 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, You may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as CRT and a dot matrix. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the main display unit 43, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a plurality A configuration in which the color of the seed is switched and displayed can be considered.

  In the accessory display unit 44, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning to the through gate 35 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the through gate 35 is displayed as a result of stopping the variation display. Explicit by display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 35 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the state where the electric role is opened, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 34a provided in the lower working port 34 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 that performs variable display (or variable display or switching display) of symbols that are a kind of symbols. The variable display unit 36 is provided with a center frame 42 so as to surround the symbol display device 41. The center frame 42 has an upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from dropping in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 41, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is lowered due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. .

  The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the top, middle and bottom, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled in the horizontal direction. In this case, the change display on the symbol display device 41 is started based on winning in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. That is, when variable display is performed on the main display unit 43, variable display is performed on the symbol display device 41 accordingly. Then, for example, in the game times that shift to the opening / closing execution mode in which the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened as the opening / closing execution mode, the symbol display device 41 is on an active line set in advance. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed.

  By the way, based on the winning at any one of the operation ports 33, 34, the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41 start the variable display, until the predetermined stop result is displayed and the variable display is stopped. It corresponds to one game time.

  In the upper left part on the front side of the center frame 42, a main hold light emitting unit 45 that emits and displays the number of holds is provided corresponding to the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41. The main reserved light emitting unit 45 is composed of LEDs. The maximum number of game balls won in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed when the main holding light emitting unit 45 is turned on.

  In the upper right part of the center frame 42, there is provided an accessory holding light emitting unit 46 that displays the number of holdings in a light emitting manner corresponding to the accessory display unit 44. The accessory light-holding light emitting unit 46 is composed of LEDs. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by lighting the on-hold holding light emitting unit 46.

  An inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the game board 24, and a guide rail is configured by the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52, and is mounted below the game board 24 in the inner frame. A game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism (not shown) is guided to the upper part of the game area. The game ball launching mechanism launches a game ball by operating a launch handle 54 provided on the front door frame 14.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 described above is fitted therein. Although the window panel 62 is colorless and transparent with glass, the window panel 62 is not limited to this and may be colorless and transparent with synthetic resin.

  Around the window portion 61, light emitting means such as various light emitting portions are provided. A display light emitting unit 63 is provided above the window 61 as a part of the various light emitting units. These various light emitting units are composed of LEDs. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 63, speaker units 64 that output sound effects according to the gaming state are provided.

  Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. An upper pan 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower pan 72 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 71. The game balls paid out from the payout device mounted on the back pack unit are discharged to the upper plate 71 and the lower plate 72.

  An operation portion 75 that can be operated by the player is provided above the firing handle 54 in the front door frame 14. The operation unit 75 is connected to an effect control device described later, and a predetermined effect is executed by operating the operation unit 75.

  A main control device, an effect control device, and a display control device are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, as described above, a back pack unit is provided on the back surface of the inner frame. The back pack unit includes a payout mechanism including a payout device, a payout control device, a power source and a firing control device. Is installed. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Basic electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 202 is mounted on the main control board 201 provided in the main control device 81. The MPU 202 includes a ROM 203 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 202 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 203 is executed. A RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 203 and the RAM 204 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 202, and each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to MPUs of other control devices.

  The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 202, a power interruption monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, various detection sensors 211 and the like provided in the main control device 81 are connected. In this case, a power supply and launch control device 98 is connected to the power interruption monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power interruption monitoring board 205. Further, as a part of the various detection sensors 211, for a winning winning entry portion (a payout corresponding entry portion) such as a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating opening 33, a lower operating opening 34, a through gate 35, and the like. A plurality of detection sensors provided in a one-to-one correspondence are connected to each other, and the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 performs a winning determination (entering determination) for each entering part. In addition, the MPU 202 executes a lottery occurrence lottery based on a winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 and also performs a support generating lottery based on a winning to the through gate 35.

  On the output side of the MPU 202, a power interruption monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, and an effect control device 82 are connected. For example, the payout control device 97 outputs a winning ball command based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning portion. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is referred to. When a winning to the general winning opening 31 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to payout of 10 game balls is output, and when a winning to the variable winning device 32 is specified, 15 winning balls are output. When a winning ball command corresponding to paying out a game ball is output and a winning to the upper operating port 33 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out three gaming balls is output and sent to the lower operating port 34. When a winning is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

  Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and a change end command are output to the effect control device 82. In this case, the command information storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is referred to when these various commands are output. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each command is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information of the predetermined number of bytes.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning drive unit 32c that opens and closes the open / close door 32b of the variable winning device 32, an electric combination drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34, and a main display. The unit 43 is connected. The main control board 201 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 202 performs drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  The power interruption monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply and launch control device 98, and monitors the voltage of 24 VDC which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

  The power source and launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 201 and the payout control device 97, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do. The power supply and launch control device 98 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism based on the launch permission signal output from the main control board 201, and the game ball launch mechanism has predetermined launch conditions. Driven when.

  The effect control device 82 is based on various commands input from the main control device 81, and each of the on-hold light emitting units 45 and 46 provided on the variable display unit 36 and the display light emitting unit 63 and speaker unit provided on the front door frame 14. 64 is driven and controlled. In addition, the effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212. In the display control device 212, display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed based on the command input from the effect control device 82.

  Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, a plurality of variable display areas are set on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of variable display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order.

  Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine kinds of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display screen G, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, the display screen G is designed to stop and display three symbols for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has come to be.

  The display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number attached to any one of the effective lines is formed. When the variation display of .about.Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of a normal jackpot result or a probable variation jackpot result which will be described later.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols”, and when a probable big hit result occurs, the same specific symbol combination Is stopped. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “non-specific symbols”. When a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. The

  In addition, the mode of the display of the symbol variation in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the symbol variation display in the symbol sequence, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. In addition, the type of the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the symbol with the numeral as described above. For example, the numeral itself may be variably displayed. May be displayed in a variable manner.

  On the lower part of the display screen G, a hold display area Ga is set. In the hold display area Ga, unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 of the same number as the maximum hold number when a game ball is won in the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction. Is provided. Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball wins the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is four, and in correspondence with this, the reserved display area Ga includes the first unit reserved display area Ga1. A second unit hold display area Ga2, a third unit hold display area Ga3, and a fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are set.

  For example, when the number of holds when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 is 1, the predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Ga1, and the game ball In the case where the number of holds when winning the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 is four, predetermined holding images are displayed in all of the first unit holding display area Ga1 to the fourth unit holding display area Ga4. Is done.

  Further, at the bottom of the display screen G, an execution display area Gb is set in parallel with the hold display area Ga. In the execution display area Gb, the predetermined hold image corresponding to the currently executed game time is displayed.

<About various counters and reserved ball storage area>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  The MPU 202 uses lots of counter information in the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the main display unit 43, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery in which the jackpot is generated, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result, Reach random number counter C3 used for reach lottery when the symbol display device 41 fluctuates and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of the jackpot random number counter C1, and fluctuations in the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41 A variation type counter CS that determines the display time is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is in the electric utility open state is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 of the RAM 204. Among these, in the lottery counter buffer 231, information corresponding to the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS is awarded to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. The stored information is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 as the acquired information storage means.

  The holding ball storage area 232 includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and matches the winning history to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 is stored as holding information in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4. The

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RE2 → third reserved area RE3 → fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 are stored on hold. The reserved ball storage area 232 includes a reserved number storage area NA. The reserved number storage area NA specifies the number in which the winning history for the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is stored. Information for storing is stored.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display on the main display unit 43, and at the start of one game round. Based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE, determination of whether or not is made is performed.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured so that, for example, one by one is added in the range of 0 to 299, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to zero. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 299). The big hit random number counter C <b> 1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 221 as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 203.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the success / failure lottery means. The number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the low probability mode is different from the number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the high probability mode, and the former is smaller than the latter. As a result, the probability that the high probability mode is a big win is higher than that of the low probability mode.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C <b> 2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203. As the distribution destination, a normal jackpot result and a probable variation jackpot result are set.

  The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the success / failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, the probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  In the distribution table, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 29” corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result, but this numerical distribution is arbitrary. In addition, the distribution destination of the jackpot result is not limited to the above two types. For example, in the opening / closing execution mode, a plurality of modes are set so that the expected value of the game ball is high and the opening / closing execution is performed. It is good also as a structure which increases the type of jackpot result rather than said two types by providing a difference in the mode transfer destination mode.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203, it is determined whether to generate a reach. For example, the reach table is set so that “200 to 239” is numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence win.

  Incidentally, in the game times that shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  Here, the reach display (reach state) is a game time in which the symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures) is provided, and the variable winning device 32 is in the opening / closing execution mode. In the gaming machine in which the stop display result after the variable display becomes the special display result, the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 41 is started and the stop display result is derived and displayed. The display state for causing the player to think that the display state is a variable display state that is likely to result in the special display result.

  In other words, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is established by stopping the symbols for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. This is a display state in which possible reach symbol combinations are displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

  More specifically, as a step before ending the symbol variation display, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is established on a preset active line in the display screen of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying possible combinations of reach symbols, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner by the final stop symbol sequence in a situation where the reach line is formed.

  The display contents in FIG. 4 will be specifically described. First, high-speed fluctuation display is started for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or difficult to recognize which symbol is displayed. Thereafter, the variation display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display in which the player can recognize or easily recognize the symbol displayed. Then, the fluctuation display of the upper symbol row Z1 ends, and the fluctuation display mode of the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. Thereafter, the variable display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends. In this case, a reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. When the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the main symbol having the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is attached. Is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the symbol variation display in the middle symbol row Z2 is terminated.

  In the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed on the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. There are those that produce an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire display screen after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols. Further, when reach display is performed or before reach display, it is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counter whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character. May be.

  The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 199, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 202 determines the variation display time on the main display unit 43 and the symbol variation display time on the symbol display device 41. Note that, when the variation display time is determined using the variation type counter CS, the variation display time table stored in the variation display time table storage area 222 of the ROM 203 is referred to.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 249 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric utility reservation area of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state based on the value of the stored electric accessory release counter C4.

<About various processes executed by the MPU 202 of the main control board 201>
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process that are executed when the game of each game is advanced by the MPU 202 of the main control board 201 will be described.

  In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 202 executes a main process that is activated when the power is turned on, and transmits an interruption signal from the interruption monitoring board 205 to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). An NMI interrupt process activated by an input is executed, but the description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 202 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, the state of the sensor corresponding to the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 connected to the main control device 81 is read, and the state of the sensor is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. .

  After executing the reading process in step S101, the process proceeds to step S102. In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In a succeeding step S104, a through winning process associated with winning through the through gate 35 is executed. In the through-winning process, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored on the condition that the stored number of stored features is less than 4 stored in the reserved role area. Store in the area. In addition, the effect control device 82 executes processing for lighting the accessory holding light-emitting unit 46 of the variable display unit 36 corresponding to the accessory holding storage number.

  Thereafter, in step S105, after the winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning of the operating ports 33 and 34 is executed, the timer interruption process is terminated.

<Winning process for working port>
The winning process for the operation opening will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S <b> 201, it is determined whether or not the upper working port winning flag is stored in the upper working port winning flag storage area in the various flag storing area 234 of the RAM 204. The upper working opening winning flag is stored in the reading process (step S101) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 6) when a game ball is won into the upper working opening 33. If the upper operation opening winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S207 without executing the processes of steps S202 to S206. If the upper working opening winning flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S202.

  In step S202, the upper operation opening winning flag is deleted. In the subsequent step S203, the value stored in the reserved number storage area NA of the reserved ball storage area 232 is read, and the reserved storage number N stored in the reserved area RE is the upper limit value (“4” in this embodiment). ) Is determined. If the reserved storage number N is equal to or greater than the upper limit value, the process directly proceeds to step S207. If the reserved storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S204, and the reserved storage number N is incremented by one.

  In the following step S205, the values (each numerical information) of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS updated in the previous step S103 are used as the free holding area of the holding area RE. Stored in the first reserved area among RE1 to RE4, that is, the reserved area corresponding to the reserved storage number N added by 1 in step S204.

  In the following step S206, the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212, which are control devices on the sub-side (sub-side), recognize that the winning to the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 has occurred, and the effect control device. In 82, a confirmation process for the hold notice, which is a process for executing the hold notice, is executed. Such processing will be described in detail later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S201, a negative determination is made in step S203, or after the processing in step S206 is executed, the process proceeds to step S207 in the lower operation port winning flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. It is determined whether or not an operation opening winning flag is stored. The lower working opening winning flag is stored in the reading process (step S101) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 6) when a game ball is won into the lower working opening 34. If the lower operation opening winning flag is not stored, the main winning process is terminated as it is. If the lower working opening winning flag is stored, the processing of steps S203 to S206 is executed after the lower working opening winning flag is deleted in step S208. In this case, by making a negative determination in the process of step S207 after the processes of step S203 to step S206, the main winning process is terminated.

  In a configuration in which an upper operating port 33 and a lower operating port 34 are provided as operating ports in the game area, and winning to both the operating ports 33 and 34 can occur simultaneously, the upper operating port can be achieved by one processing of timer interrupt processing. It is determined whether or not a winning to 33 has occurred and whether or not a winning to the lower operating port 34 has occurred, and when winning to both operating ports 33 and 34 has occurred simultaneously, The information acquisition processing in steps S203 to S205 and the information transmission processing to the sub-side control device based on the winning in step S206 are executed for the winning. As a result, even when winnings to both the operating ports 33 and 34 occur at the same time, acquisition of holding information based on winning to the upper operating port 33 and acquisition of holding information based on winning to the lower operating port 34 are obtained. It is possible to accurately perform the information transmission process to the sub-side control device at an early timing.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S301 to S306 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S308 and S309 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S301, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. Further, in the case where production commands such as various hold commands, variation commands, type commands, variation end commands, etc. are set, they are transmitted to the production control device 82.

  Next, in step S302, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In the subsequent step S303, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 97 are read. Thereafter, in step S304, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In this game times control process, jackpot determination, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the main display unit 43, and the like are performed. The game times control process will be described later in detail.

  Thereafter, in step S305, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By this gaming state transition process, the gaming state transitions to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, or the like.

  In subsequent step S306, an electric combination support process for driving and controlling the electric combination 34a provided in the lower working port 34 is executed. In this electronic combination support process, it is determined whether or not the electric combination 34a is opened, display control of the combination display 44, and the like are performed. In this case, as already described, a lottery is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger, and drive control of the electric accessory 34a is performed based on the lottery result.

  In the subsequent step S307, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing (steps S308 and S309). That is, in step S308, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. In step S309, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S301 to S306 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random. Similarly, The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process of step S304 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In the game times control process shown in FIG. 9, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether an opening / closing execution mode flag (opening / closing execution state information) is stored in an opening / closing execution mode flag storage area (opening / closing execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. The opening / closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process, and is similarly deleted when the opening / closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

  When in the opening / closing execution mode, the game is executed without executing any of the processes after step S402, that is, the game turn start process in steps S402 to S405 and the game turn progress process in steps S406 to S409. End control processing. In other words, in the open / close execution mode, the game times are not started regardless of whether or not a winning for the operation ports 33 and 34 has occurred.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S402 whether or not the main display unit 43 is in a variable display. In this determination, it is determined whether or not the variable display flag (variable display information) is stored in the variable display flag storage area (variable display information storage unit) in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. To do. The variable display flag is stored when the main display unit 43 starts the variable display, and is deleted when the variable display ends.

  If the main display unit 43 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to a game turn start process in steps S403 to S405. In the game turn starting process, first, in step S403, it is determined whether or not the number N of reserved memories is “0”. The case where the number N of reserved storage is “0” means that no holding information is stored in the holding ball storage area 232. Accordingly, the game turn control process is terminated as it is.

  If the number N of stored memory is not “0”, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the stored ball storage area 232 for variable display is executed in step S404, and the main data is further stored in step S405. A variation start process for starting variation display on the display unit 43 and variation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. When the variation start process is executed, the game times control process is terminated.

  Here, the data setting process in step S404 and the change start process in step S405 will be described in detail below.

  First, the data setting process in step S404 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the data setting process, first, in step S501, the reserved storage number N is decremented by one. In subsequent step S502, the data stored in first holding area RE1 of holding area RE is moved to execution area AE.

  Thereafter, in step S503, a process of shifting the data (that is, the holding information) stored in each holding area RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first reservation area RE1 and the second The data in each area is shifted such as the reserved area RE2 → the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, and the fourth reserved area RE4 → the third reserved area RE3.

  In the subsequent step S504, a shift command is set, which is information for causing the effect control device 82 to recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated. The shift command set in step S504 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 8). The effect control device 82 receives the shift command, and executes a process for changing the display on the main hold light emitting unit 45 in accordance with the decrease in the hold number. In addition, the effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 to execute a process for changing the display in the hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the hold number.

  Next, the variation start process of step S405 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the change start process, first, in step S601, a success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the hold information corresponding to the current change start process corresponds to the big win is executed. In the success / failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is a high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, with reference to the high probability mode success / failure table among the tables stored in the success / failure table storage area 221, the information for the success / failure determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, It is determined whether or not the value related to the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the high probability jackpot value information. In the case of the low probability mode, the value related to the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with reference to the low probability mode success / failure table among the tables stored in the success / failure table storage area 221. Is matched with the jackpot numerical information for low probability.

  After performing the success / failure determination process in step S601, it is determined in step S602 whether or not a big hit is won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. If jackpot information is stored, type determination processing is executed in step S603.

  In the type determination process, the information acquired from the information for type determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information updated by the big hit type counter C2 is grasped. Also, information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot information is acquired from the distribution table in the ROM 203. Then, both pieces of information are compared, and it is specified whether or not the information corresponds to probability variation jackpot information.

  In a succeeding step S604, it is determined whether or not the type of winning the big hit is a probable big hit result based on the information specified in the type determining process in the step S603. If it is a probability variation jackpot result, stop result setting processing for probability variation jackpot is executed in step S605, and if it is not a probability variation jackpot result, stop result setting processing for normal jackpot is executed in step S606. If it is determined in step S602 that it is not a big win, a stop result setting process for losing is executed in step S607.

  In each stop result setting process of step S605 to step S607, information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is specified from information stored in advance in the ROM 203, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 204. Remember. Further, in step S605 and step S606, information for specifying in the MPU 202 that the determination result of whether or not this game is successful is a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result is stored in various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204 ( The information “1” is stored in the corresponding area). Specifically, the probability variation jackpot flag is stored in step S605, and the normal jackpot flag is stored in step S606.

  After executing any one of steps S605 to S607, in step S608, a variable display time setting process is executed.

  Here, the setting process of the variable display time will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 12, in the process for setting the variable display time, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not a big win is won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. If the jackpot is won, in a subsequent step S702, the variable display time table for jackpot time is acquired from the variable display time table storage area 222 of the ROM 203. If it is not a big win and the result is a losing result, a fluctuation display time table at the time of losing is acquired from the fluctuation display time table storage area 222 in step S703.

  In each variation display time table, the variation display time is determined by the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS, and the number N of stored storage at the start of variation. That is, as shown in FIG. 13, the presence or absence of reach is determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the variation pattern is determined by the value of the variation type counter CS. In this embodiment, the fluctuation display time is determined by the hold number non-corresponding pattern in which the variable display time is determined regardless of the hold memory number N at the start of change, and the hold memory number N at the start of change. The number-of-holds correspondence pattern is defined.

  More specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 is 0 to 4 in the variable display time table at the time of big hit, it is set to the game number in which no reach occurs. Among them, the case where the value of the variation type counter CS is 0 to 24 is set as the variation pattern of the reach non-occurrence A, and this is the variation pattern of the holding number non-corresponding pattern. In this case, the variable display time is set to 10 sec regardless of the value of the number N of reserved storage at the start of the fluctuation. In addition, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is 25 to 49 among the non-reach occurrences, the fluctuation pattern of the reach non-occurrence B is set, and this is the fluctuation pattern of the holding number correspondence pattern. In this case, the variable display time is set to 10 sec when the reserved memory number N at the start of the fluctuation is 0 to 1, and the variable display time is set to 5 sec when the reserved memory number N is 2 to 3.

  When the value of the reach random number counter C3 is 5 to 99 in the variation display time table at the time of big hit, it is set to the game number of occurrence of reach. Of these, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 is 5 to 19, it is set to a game time where normal reach occurs, and when the value of the reach random number counter C3 is 20 to 99, it is set to game times where super reach occurs. Is done.

  Here, the super reach is a reach display in which the expectation of winning the big hit is higher than that of the normal reach. Furthermore, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C are set in the super reach. Super Reach A to C are set such that Super Reach C is set to have the highest expectation level for jackpot winning and C, B, and A are set to have a higher expectation level for winning the jackpot. These super-reach A to C are also different in the contents of the production, super-reach A and B are set to play an animated movie, and super-reach C is set to play a live-action movie. ing. Note that different animation movies are set for Super Reach A and B. The super reach A to C have different variable display times, the super reach C is set to have the longest variable display time, and the variable display times are set to be longer in the order of C, B, and A. More specifically, the super reach A is set to 45 sec, the super reach B is set to 60 sec, and the super reach C is set to 90 sec. The game times in which these super reaches A to C are generated are fluctuation patterns of the hold number non-corresponding pattern in which the game times are performed in the set variable display time regardless of the value of the hold memory number N at the start of the change. .

  In game games in which normal reach occurs at the time of a big hit, the case where the variation type counter CS is 0 to 24 is set as the variation pattern of the normal reach A, and this is the variation pattern of the non-holding number correspondence pattern. In this case, the variable display time is set to 20 sec regardless of the value of the number N of stored storage at the start of the fluctuation. Further, among the game times in which normal reach occurs, the case where the value of the variation type counter CS is 25 to 49 is set as the variation pattern of the normal reach B, and this is the variation pattern of the holding number correspondence pattern. In this case, the variable display time is set to 20 sec when the reserved memory number N at the start of change is 0 to 1, and the variable display time is set to 15 sec when the hold memory number N is 2 to 3. Normal reach A and normal reach B have the same effect pattern after the occurrence of reach, but the contents until the occurrence of reach, that is, the contents of the notice effect, etc. differ until the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 stop. ing. That is, the length of the fluctuation display time between the normal reach A and the normal reach B is based on the length of time until the reach occurs, and the length of time from the start to the end of the reach is the same for any normal reach A and B. Is set to

  On the other hand, in the fluctuation display time table at the time of detachment, all of reach non-occurrence A, reach non-occurrence B, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B and super reach C are set. The probability of occurrence is different. That is, at the time of detachment, the reach random number counter C3 is set to non-reach when 0 to 59, the reach is set to 60 to 99, and the probability of reach is set lower than the jackpot. Yes. When the reach is not generated, the value of the variation type counter CS is set to 0 to 24 as reach non-occurrence A, and the case of 25 to 49 is set as reach non-occurrence B.

  Among reach occurrences at the time of detachment, when reach random number counter C3 is 60 to 89, normal reach is set, and when it is 90 to 99, super reach is set, and the occurrence rate of super reach among reach occurrences is greater than that of jackpot Is set too low. In normal reach, when the variation type counter CS is 0 to 24, normal reach A is set, and 25 to 49 is set as normal reach B. In the super reach, the value of the variation type counter CS is set as super reach A when the value is 0-15, the case of 16-33 is set as super reach B, and the case of 34-49 is set as super reach C. Has been.

  In this specification, the variable display time will be described in relation to the display on the symbol display device 41. The variable display time (operation period) is the variable display after the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is started. In addition to the time until the game ends, a so-called fixed time for displaying the stop result (game result) after the variable display ends is included.

  Returning to the description of the variable display time setting process (FIG. 12), after acquiring any variable display time table in step S702 or step S703, in step S704, the acquired variable display time table and each parameter are obtained. The variable display time (operation period) corresponding to (reach random number counter C3, variable type counter CS, pending storage number N) is set in the variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. Thereafter, the variable display time setting process is terminated.

  As described above, the variation display time of each game time is determined using the game result, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the variation type counter CS as parameters. As described above, reach non-occurrence A, reach non-occurrence B, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C are set as the variation patterns to be determined. Further, a hold number correspondence pattern in which the reserved memory number N is added as a parameter and a hold number non-corresponding pattern in which the hold memory number N is not added as a parameter are set, and the fluctuation pattern of the above reach non-occurrence B and normal reach B Is a holding number correspondence pattern, and the other variation patterns are holding number non-correspondence patterns.

  The method for setting the variable display time for each game time is not limited to the above. For example, a configuration in which reach non-occurrence is not included in the case of a big hit, that is, a configuration in which a reach occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 at the time of a big hit. In addition, the generation of reach and its type may be determined using not only the reach random number counter C3 but also other counters. As another counter, for example, a stop pattern counter that determines a stop pattern of a predetermined line (for example, the middle line L2) if it is out of place is considered, and if it is a big hit, a pattern that stops and displays the same symbol combination is determined. A jackpot symbol counter or the like is possible. In this case, for example, the reach random number counter C3 may determine whether or not reach has occurred, and the other counter may determine the type.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure from which a variable display time differs according to the height of a support mode or the height of a lottery mode. For example, in the high frequency support mode, a configuration in which a short variation display time can be easily selected even when the game result is the same as in the low frequency support mode, or a configuration in which a long variation display time is easily selected. Also good. In the high frequency support mode, the hold information is acquired at a relatively high frequency, so that a smooth game can be realized by adopting a configuration in which a short variable display time is easily selected. In this case, it is preferable to add a process for determining the level of the support mode in the setting process of the variable display time, and obtain a variable display time table corresponding to the support mode.

  Returning to the description of the change start process (FIG. 11), after the change display time setting process is executed in step S608, a change command and a type command are set in step S609. The change command includes information on presence / absence of reach and information on change display time. The type command includes game result information. That is, the type command includes, as game result information, information on probability variation jackpot results, information on normal jackpot results, information on miss results, and the like.

  The change command and type command set in step S609 are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 8). The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect in the game times based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The contents of the effect include the variable display mode of the symbol on the symbol display device 41. The determined variable display mode of the symbol is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The Based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82, the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the symbol variation display corresponding to each game time is performed. Thereafter, in step S610, the variation display of the pattern is started on the main display unit 43, and then the variation start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 9), when the main display unit 43 is in a variable display, the game times progress process of steps S406 to S409 is executed. In the game times progression process, first, in step S406, it is determined whether or not the current game times change display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204 is “0”. As described above, the value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (step S608). The value of the set variable display time information is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 6) is started.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S407. In the process for variable display, the display mode in the result display section related to the current game time is changed. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished.

  If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, a fluctuation end process is executed in step S408. In the change end process, the information stored in the RAM 204 in any one of the above steps S605 to S607 is specified, and the main display unit 43 displays the pattern corresponding to the information on the main display unit 43. The display of the unit 43 is controlled.

  In the subsequent step S409, a change end command is set. The variation end command set here is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 8). The effect control device 82 ends the effect in the game times based on the received variation end command. Further, the change end command is transmitted from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212, and the display control device 212 receives the change end command, thereby confirming and displaying the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round (final). Stop). After execution of step S409, the game times control process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the gaming state transition process executed in step S305 of the normal process will be described.

  First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S803 whether or not the game result of the current game time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If none of the above flags is stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If any of the above flags is stored, start processing of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S804. In the start process, an opening waiting time (starting waiting period) for waiting without opening the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is set for opening in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, opening waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 6) is executed.

  In the subsequent step S805, a round display start process for informing the type of the current opening / closing execution mode is executed. In the round display start process, first, address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 is confirmed. Then, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 203, and the content of the number of rounds is confirmed from the specified stop result data. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43. As a result, the round display section RS displays information about the round related to the output.

  In the subsequent step S806, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 8). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. The contents of the effect include the display mode in the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. Based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82, the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that display corresponding to the current open / close execution mode (for example, moving image display) is performed.

  In the subsequent step S807, after executing the external signal setting process, the gaming state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the jackpot signal output terminal provided in the external output terminal 99 is set to the jackpot signal output state. Thereby, when the jackpot signal output terminal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the jackpot is generated in the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device. I can understand what happened.

  On the other hand, if it is in the open / close execution mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S801, and the flow proceeds to step S808. In step S808, it is determined whether the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the opening standby time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated. When the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, a special winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S809. In the big winning opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the big winning opening 32a is controlled according to the unit opening time of each round and the waiting time between rounds, and the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 32a reaches the upper limit winning number in each round. If the unit opening time has not elapsed, the variable winning drive section 32c is driven and controlled so that the large winning opening 32a is closed.

  After the big prize opening / closing process is executed in step S809, it is determined in step S810 whether the value of the round counter area RC is “0”, and whether the waiting time for ending has passed in step S811 Determine whether or not. If the value of the round counter area RC is not “0” or if the ending waiting time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when the value of the round counter area RC is “0” and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S812.

  Here, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the probability variation jackpot flag is stored, a flag erasing process for erasing information for specifying the gaming state is executed in step S902. Specifically, when the opening / closing execution mode flag, the high probability mode flag, and the high frequency support flag are stored, they are deleted, and when they are not already stored, the states are maintained. In subsequent step S903, the high probability mode flag is stored, and in step S904, the high frequency support flag is stored. As a result, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state where the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode (hereinafter, the gaming state is also referred to as a special advantageous state). After executing the processing of step S904, the migration processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S901 that the probability variation jackpot flag is not stored, the flag erasure process is executed in step S905. Thereafter, in step S906, the high frequency support flag is stored, and in step S907, “100” is set in the game number counter area provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. As a result, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode is ended when the number of game times continues 100 times, and thereafter, a transition is made to a normal game state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. After executing the processing of step S907, the migration processing is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 14), after the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in step S812 is completed, a round display termination process is executed in step S813. In this process, the display control of the round display unit RS is terminated so that the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43 is turned off. After that, in step S814, after executing the opening / closing execution mode termination processing, the gaming state transition processing is terminated. In the end processing of the opening / closing execution mode, the probability variation jackpot flag and the normal jackpot flag are deleted.

<About reservation notice>
Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the reservation notice corresponding to the content of the holding information stored in the holding ball storage area 232 has a predetermined probability at a timing before the game times related to the holding information are started. It is configured to be done in. Such a hold notice is performed by executing predetermined control in the effect control device 82 based on a predetermined command transmitted from the main control device 81. The electrical configuration and processing configuration related to the reservation notice will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 16, an MPU 242 is mounted on the effect control board 241 provided in the effect control device 82. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 242 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 243 is executed. A RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 242, and each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to MPUs of other control devices.

  The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. From the main control device 81, a hold display control command (hold display control information) such as a shift command or a hold command to be described later is received. In addition, a game time control command (game time control information) such as a change start command, a type command, and a change end command is received. Also, an open / close execution mode command (open / close execution mode information) such as an opening command and an ending command is received.

  As described above, the holding light emitting units 45 and 46 provided in the variable display unit 36 and the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 provided in the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 242. In addition, a display control device 212 is connected.

  The display control device 212 includes a display control board 251 on which an MPU 252 in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257 are mounted. Yes.

  The MPU 252 receives a hold display control command (hold display control information) for performing hold display control, a game turn control command (game time control information) for performing symbol display, from the effect control device 82. A command for opening / closing execution mode (information for opening / closing execution mode) for displaying a moving image in the opening / closing execution mode is received. Then, the received commands are analyzed or predetermined arithmetic processing is performed based on the received commands to control the VDP 255 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 255).

  The program ROM 253 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 252 and fixed value data, and JPEG format image data for a background image is also stored and held.

  The work RAM 254 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 252. These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 254.

  The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 255 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 255 should be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 255 adjusts the timings of the MPU 252, the video RAM 257, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and also reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 257 from the character ROM 256 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

  The character ROM 256 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 256 holds bit map format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bit map image, and the like.

  It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 256 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 256. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the JPEG image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 253 is stored in the character ROM 256.

  The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 257.

<Regarding processing related to pending notice>
Next, processing related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 and the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described. As the process related to the hold notice on the main control device 81 side, the confirmation process (step S206) for the hold notice in the winning process for the operation opening (FIG. 7) is set. This process is executed as a part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 6), and is executed at a timing when a winning is made to the operation ports 33 and 34.

  Hereinafter, the confirmation process for holding notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1001, the holding information stored in the holding area RE, which is the holding information acquired in step S205 based on the current winning of the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34, is stored in the big hit random number counter C1. Value (information for jackpot determination), value of jackpot type counter C2 (information for jackpot type determination), value of reach random number counter C3 (information for determination of occurrence of reach), value of variation type counter CS (variation type) Information).

  In a succeeding step S1002, it is determined whether or not a high probability flag for holding is stored in the RAM 204.

  Here, the high probability flag for holding will be described. While the hold information stored in the hold area RE is sequentially digested, the confirmation process for the hold notice is executed at a timing different from the digest timing of the hold information. In this case, a situation may occur in which the lottery mode differs between the timing when the predetermined hold information is subjected to the confirmation process for the hold notice and the timing when the hold information is consumed. For example, even if the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the timing when the predetermined hold information is subject to the confirmation process for the hold notice, the probability change is a big hit between that timing and the timing when the predetermined hold information is consumed. When the corresponding hold information is digested, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode. The high probability flag for holding is a flag for grasping the change in the lottery mode by the MPU 202 and reflecting the content in the determination of success / failure in the confirmation processing for holding notice.

  By providing the high probability flag for holding, even when the lottery mode changes with respect to the holding information to be digested later by the holding information stored in the holding area RE, the confirmation process for holding notice in the correct lottery mode is performed. This makes it possible to accurately determine the validity determination.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, a success / failure determination process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed in step S1003. If a negative determination is made in step S1002, a success / failure determination process corresponding to the low probability mode is executed in step S1004.

  After step S1003 or step S1004 is executed, a process of temporarily storing the determination result information on the determination of success / failure in step S1003 or step S1004 in the determination result storage area provided in the RAM 204 is executed in step S1005. Thereby, by grasping the determination result information stored in the determination result storage area, it is possible to grasp the determination result of the current determination.

  In a succeeding step S1006, it is determined whether or not the current hold information corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the determination result information is jackpot information and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is a value corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1006, the flag is set by storing “1” in the high probability flag for holding in step S1007.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1006, it is determined in step S1008 whether the current hold information corresponds to a normal jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether the determination result information is jackpot information and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is a value corresponding to the normal jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1008, the high probability flag for holding is cleared to “0” in step S1009.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1008 after executing one of steps S1007 and S1009, a hold command setting process is executed in step S1010, and the confirmation process for the hold notice is ended.

  The hold command setting process executed in step S1010 is a process for causing the effect control device 82 to grasp game result information and variable display time information as the contents of the hold information.

  Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18, first, in step S1101, a process for grasping information regarding the game result, that is, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 among the hold information acquired this time. Run. In the subsequent step S1102, information regarding the variable display time, that is, the values of the reach random number counter C3 and the variable type counter CS among the hold information acquired this time is executed. In step S1103, a process for setting the hold command including the information grasped in steps S1101 and S1102 as an output target to the effect control device 82 is executed, and the hold command setting process is ended. This hold command is output to the effect control device 82 in step S301 of the normal process (FIG. 8). In addition, instead of the configuration in which values such as the counters C1, C2, C3, CS, etc. are set as information relating to the game result and information relating to the variable display time, information regarding the game result and the variable display time itself is set in the hold command It is good also as a structure. By doing so, it is possible to suppress an illegal act in which the values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and CS are read from commands input and output between the main control device 81 and the effect control device 82. The same applies to other commands (variation command, type command, variation end command, etc.) input / output between the main control device 81 on the main side and the production control device 82 on the sub side. It is preferable that information set from the counter value, not the value itself, be set in these commands. Even if these commands are configured to output the value of the random number counter on the main side involved in the player's profit to the sub side, there is a possibility that the random number update timing is grasped and fraudulent acts may be performed. is there.

  Next, processing related to the hold notice on the side of the effect control device 82 will be described. The processing on the side of the effect control device 82 is roughly classified into a hold control command response process and a special hold notice control process. The hold control command handling process is a process for handling a hold control command (hold command or shift command) from the main control device 81, and the special hold notice control process is a special hold set in the hold notice. This is a process for controlling the advance notice. Each of these processes is set to be activated every predetermined period (for example, 2 msec). In the effect control device 82, in addition to these processes, a variable display control process for controlling the effect for game times is set. This variable display control process is also set to be started at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 msec).

  First, the hold control command handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1201, it is determined whether a hold command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S 1201, 1 is added to the secondary-side reserved storage number SN stored in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 in step S 1202. In a succeeding step S1203, a hold display setting process is executed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as a pre-reading effect that is a kind of the reservation notice, an effect is set in which the holding image P displayed in the holding display area Ga of the symbol display device 41 is made to correspond to the holding information. A plurality of types of holding images P are set corresponding to the expected degree of jackpot of the holding information, and the holding image P corresponding to the expected degree of jackpot of the holding information is displayed as a prefetch effect.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20A, as the holding image P, the first holding image P1 (A), the second holding image P2 (B), the third holding image P3 (C), A fourth hold image P4 (D) and a fifth hold image P5 (E) are set. These hold images P1 to P5 are set to have different colors and shapes, for example, so that they can be distinguished from each other. ing. In the present embodiment, for example, the first hold image P1 is rainbow, the second hold image P2 is gold, the third hold image P3 is red, the fourth hold image P4 is yellow, and the fifth hold image P5. Is displayed in blue. In the figure, the hatch settings are displayed differently.

  In the hold display setting process in step S1203, a hold image P corresponding to the received hold command is set from the hold images P1 to P5. In this case, the hold display pattern table stored in the ROM 243 is acquired, and the corresponding hold images P1 to P5 are set from the information included in the hold command. As the hold display pattern table, as shown in FIG. 21, a hold display pattern table at the time of jackpot and a hold display pattern table at the time of release are set. Then, based on the game result information (the jackpot random number counter C1) in the information included in the hold command, it is determined whether or not the hold information corresponding to the hold command is a jackpot result. In some cases, the hold display pattern table at the time of jackpot is acquired, and in other cases (in the case of a loss result), the hold display pattern table at the time of release is acquired.

  In the hold display pattern table at the time of jackpot, the hold images P1 are respectively set according to various fluctuation patterns (reach non-occurrence A, reach non-occurrence B, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B and super reach C). -P5 are set to have different selection rates. The probability that the first hold image P1 is most selected is set to be low, and the probability that the first hold image P1 is selected in the order of P1, P2, P3, P4, and P5 is set to be low. In addition, when super reach A to C is compared with normal reach A and B, super reach A to C is more likely to select a holding image with a smaller number, and normal reach A and B and reach non-occurrence A and B are In comparison, the normal reach A and B are set so that the holding image having the smaller number is more easily selected.

  In the super reach A to C, when the easiness of selection of the holding image having the smaller number is compared, the super reach C is most easily selected, and is set to be easily selected in the order of C, B, and A. . In the normal reach A and B, the normal reach A is selected more easily than the normal reach B, and in the non-reach A and B, the non-reach A is set more easily than the non-reach B. In the non-reach B, the first hold image P1 is set not to be selected.

  In the hold display pattern table at the time of losing, the same fluctuation pattern (reach non-occurrence A, reach non-occurrence B, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B and super Even in the case of reach C), the setting is made so that it is difficult to select the holding image with the smaller number. For example, the first hold image P1 to the third hold image P3 are not selected in the non-reach occurrences A and B at the time of release, and the fifth hold image P4 and the fifth hold image P5 are used for the fifth hold. The image P5 is easier to select than the fourth holding image P4. Further, the first hold image P1 and the second hold image P2 are not selected in the normal reach A and B at the time of detachment, and the fifth hold image P5 is selected in the third hold image P3 to the fifth hold image P5. It is easy to select, and it is easy to select in order of P5, P4, P3. Further, in any variation pattern, the first hold image P1 is set so as not to be selected at the time of deviation.

  In other words, in the hold display pattern table at the time of jackpot and the hold display pattern table at the time of release, the hold image having a smaller number is more easily selected as the degree of expectation of the jackpot is higher, and the number is increased as the variable display time is longer. A small hold image is set to be easily selected. Therefore, by displaying the holding image with the smaller number, the player expects a big hit result in the game times corresponding to the holding image, and about the game times for which the determination of success / failure is held It is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention before the game times are executed.

  On the other hand, it is possible to predict that the holding information on which the holding image having the larger number is displayed is not a jackpot result but a losing result. Therefore, the game times related to such hold information can be game times waiting for digestion for the player. In particular, when an effect pattern with a long variation display time is selected in such a game round, the effect is performed over a long period of time despite the player predicting that the result is a losing result. May feel redundant. Furthermore, for a case in which a holding image with a smaller number is displayed with respect to the holding information that is the target of the success / failure determination after the holding information corresponding to the holding image on the side with a larger number, this number is displayed. While the degree of attention to the game times related to the hold information on the smaller side increases, the effect of making the game times related to the hold information on the larger number side feel redundant is considered to increase. On the other hand, if an effect pattern with a short variation display time is selected in the game times that are predicted to be a jackpot result, the result is different even though it is predicted to be a jackpot result. Can be the result of suspicious. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 10, a special hold notice is set as a kind of hold notice in order to eliminate the above-mentioned inconvenience due to the length of the variable display time.

  That is, after executing the hold display setting process in step S1203 in the hold control command response process (FIG. 19), the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether or not the pending notice counter YK provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 is less than “3”. The hold notice counter YK is a counter for adjusting the number of executions of the special hold notice.

  Here, the special reservation notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In a special hold notice, which is a kind of hold notice, a predetermined hold image is set to change to another hold image based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. More specifically, the predetermined holding image changes to a holding image having a smaller number than the predetermined holding image based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

  Specifically, the condition for changing the hold image is a condition related to the passage of time from the start to the end of the special hold notice. The special hold notice starts from the start of display of the hold image, that is, from the time when the hold information is acquired. In the game time of the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice, the lower symbol row Z3 is displayed from the high-speed change display. It is set to end at the timing of switching to the low speed fluctuation display. Then, at the start of this special hold notice, a predetermined set time is displayed, and this predetermined set time elapses before the special hold notice ends, that is, the hold subject to the special hold notice. The hold image displayed for the hold information subject to the special hold notice when the predetermined set time elapses before the lower symbol row Z3 is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display in the information game. Changes to a holding image having a smaller number than the displayed holding image. In the following description, the condition for changing the hold image in the special hold notice is also referred to as a special condition.

  As the special hold notice, in FIG. 20B, for example, a time display for displaying the predetermined set time above the hold image so as to correspond to the hold image in the third unit hold display area Ga3. The region GE is set, and the time display image Gp is displayed in the time display region GE. The time display area GE is configured so that the time display image Gp, the hold image, and the hold image can be recognized by, for example, a balloon so that the player can recognize which hold image is the hold information subject to the special hold notice. Are displayed in association with each other. This time display image Gp is associated with a predetermined set time, for example, “68.40” is displayed in 0.01 sec increments, and counts down every 0.01 sec from the start to the end of the special hold notice. The display is updated with the format.

  Then, in the special hold notice, the hold image is uniformly displayed as the fourth hold image P4 at the start, and the fourth hold image P4 is a hold image on the side having a smaller number (for example, the third hold image). The image P3) can be changed. For example, as shown in FIG. 20 (c), in the game time of the holding information subject to the special holding notice, the time before the lower symbol row Z3 switches from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. When the display image Gp becomes “00.00” and the special condition is satisfied, the hold image subject to the special hold notice in the execution display area Gb is changed from the fourth hold image P4 to the third hold image P3. Change.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20 (d), in the game time of the hold information subject to the special hold notice, the time before the lower symbol row Z3 switches from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. When the display image Gp cannot be “00.00” and the special condition is not satisfied, the hold image that is the target of the special hold notice in the execution display area Gb is the fourth hold image. The image P4 remains unchanged.

  In this case, the time display image Gp at the end of the high-speed fluctuation display is continuously displayed even after the special hold notice ends, that is, after the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3. However, the countdown of the time display image Gp is stopped, and the remaining time at the end of the special hold notice is continuously displayed.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, as the special hold notice, the displayed hold image changes to a hold image on the side with a high jackpot expectation level (side with a smaller number) based on the establishment of the special condition. It is possible to produce an effect as if the degree of expectation of jackpot has increased for the hold information corresponding to the changed hold image. Since this special condition is that a predetermined set time elapses from the start to the end of the special hold notice, the longer the variation display time of the game times from the start to the end of the special hold notice, the longer this predetermined condition is. The set time of elapses easily and special conditions are easily established. For this reason, the player expects that when the special reservation notice is started, the variation display time of the game times consumed until the special reservation notice ends is long.

  Here, it is considered that setting a predetermined effect (for example, super reach display) having a high expectation level for jackpot during the game round contributes to increasing the degree of attention to the game. And it is thought that the degree of attention increases as the predetermined production becomes flashy. However, even if the performance of the game times becomes flashy and the performance continues for a long time, the game result does not change, and for a player who wants to know the game result quickly, Prolonging the production may not be preferable.

  Furthermore, in this pachinko machine 10, as already explained, the jackpot expectation degree can be predicted from the relevance to the hold notice, and it may not be possible to expect the jackpot simply by the occurrence of a predetermined effect. . That is, for example, even if a super-reach occurs in the game times in which the above-described holding image P for the holding notice is the holding image P on the side where the jackpot expectation is low, the holding image P on the side where the jackpot expectation is high Compared to the case where super reach occurs in game times, it is not possible to expect a jackpot. Therefore, if you are predicting that this is a result of losing, if the super reach is unfolding, the time between them will be simply waiting for digestion, and the inconvenience due to the longer production will be more It can be remarkable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the variation display time of the game times digested during the period when the special hold notice is performed is long, the special display is set so that the special condition is easily established. It is possible to avoid inconvenience due to a long time.

  Returning to the description of the hold control command response process (FIG. 19), if the hold notice counter is less than “3” in step S1204, the special hold notice setting process is executed in step S1205. The special reservation notice setting process is a process for performing various settings for the effect when the special reservation notice is executed. The special hold notice setting process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1301, based on the information included in the hold command received this time, it is determined whether the hold information that triggered the hold command is any jackpot result. If it is any jackpot result, the process advances to step S1302 to execute a process for grasping stored hold information.

  The hold information grasping process in step S1302 is a process for grasping the variable information display time of the hold information stored in the hold storage area 250 provided in the RAM 244. The holding storage area 250 is a storage area corresponding to the holding ball storage area 232 on the main control device 81 side, and can store information included in the received holding command in association with each holding information.

  In the hold information grasping process in step S1302, it is first determined in step S1401 whether or not unconfirmed hold information exists in the hold storage area 250 as shown in the flowchart of FIG. If unconfirmed hold information exists, a variable display time table is acquired in step S1402, and processing for grasping the variable display time for unconfirmed hold information is executed in step S1403. Here, in the various table storage areas 245 in the ROM 243 of the effect control device 82, the same variable display time table as the variable display time table (FIG. 13) on the main control device 81 side is stored. Information related to the variable display time included in the hold command, that is, the reach random number counter C3 and the change type counter CS are stored in the hold storage area 250 in the hold increase process (step S1208 in FIG. 19) described later. Therefore, based on the information stored in the storage area for holding 250 or the information included in the received holding command and the information in the various table storage areas 245, the presentation control device 82 side also displays the variable information on the variable display time. It is possible to grasp.

  However, as already described, a holding number correspondence pattern and a holding number non-corresponding pattern are set in the effect pattern in each game time, and in the case of the holding number correspondence pattern, the holding memory at the start of the game time is set. The variable display time is determined based on the number N (secondary reserved storage number SN). Then, the number N of reserved memories at the start timing of the hold information grasping process (FIG. 23) may be different from the number N of reserved memories at the start timing of the game times of the stored hold information. Therefore, there is a possibility that the fluctuation display time cannot be specified (understood) in step S1403.

  Therefore, in step S1404, it is determined based on the processing result in step S1403 whether or not the variable display time can be specified. If it can be identified, that is, if the game time related to the pending information that is confirmed this time is an effect pattern of the pending number non-correspondence pattern, the process returns to step S1401 to determine the presence or absence of unconfirmed pending information, and unconfirmed pending If there is information, the process proceeds to step S1402 again. If there is no unconfirmed hold information, the hold information grasping process is terminated.

  As a specific example of the determination process in step S1401, for example, a confirmation counter is set, and the counter is incremented by 1 each time the determination in step S1401 is performed. Then, the hold information is stored in an area of the hold storage area 250 corresponding to the value of the counter (for example, if the counter value is 2, the area where the hold information that is the target of the second determination is stored). Check if it is. If the hold information is stored in the area corresponding to the counter value, an affirmative determination is made in step S1401. If the hold information is not stored in the area corresponding to the counter value, the hold information is stored in the subsequent areas. Is not stored in step S1401, a negative determination is made. If a negative determination is made in step S1401, the counter is set to an initial value (1). As a result, the confirmation process can be performed from the first area of the storage area for holding 250 in the next processing time.

  If it is determined in step S1404 that the variable display time cannot be specified, that is, if the game time related to the hold information confirmed this time is an effect pattern of the hold number correspondence pattern, the process proceeds to step S1405, and various types of RAM 244 are stored. After storing the non-time identifiable flag in the flag storage area 234, the hold information grasping process is terminated. The time specification impossibility flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that the hold information of the hold number correspondence pattern is included.

  Returning to the description of the special hold notice setting process (FIG. 22), after executing the hold information grasping process in step S1302, whether or not the variable display time of the stored hold information stored in step S1303 can be specified. Execute the process of determining. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the time identifiable flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 244.

  If the time specification impossibility flag is not stored in step S1303 and the variable display time of the stored hold information can be specified, an effect setting process when the time specification is possible is executed in step S1304. Then, the special hold notice setting process is terminated. In addition, if the time specification impossibility flag is stored in step S1303 and the fluctuation display time of the stored hold information cannot be specified, an effect setting process when the time specification is impossible is performed in step S1305. After execution, the special hold notice setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the hold information related to the hold command received this time is not a jackpot result but a miss result in step S1301, execution of the effect setting process at the time of miss is executed in step S1306, and then this special The hold notice setting process is terminated.

  Hereinafter, the effect setting process when the time can be specified in step S1304, the effect setting process when the time cannot be specified in step S1305, and the effect setting process when the time is out of step S1306 will be described.

<Production setting process when time can be specified>
First, the effect setting process when the time can be specified will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1501, the special hold notice table at the time when the time can be specified is acquired from the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 among the special hold notice tables for the big hit. In step S1501, the effect pattern counter EK is acquired from the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244. As shown in FIG. 25 (a), a time specifying pattern, a normal pattern, and a premier pattern are set in the special reservation notice table when the time can be specified as shown in FIG. The contents of these effects will be described together with the description of each process. The effect pattern counter EK is a loop counter that is incremented by 1 at predetermined intervals in order within a range of 0 to 999, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Then, in step S1502, based on the special reservation notice table when the time can be specified acquired in step S1501 and the production pattern counter EK, the production content of the special special notice is a normal pattern (EK = 500-699).

  If it is a normal pattern, the process proceeds to step S1503, and a timer input process for a normal pattern is executed as a process for setting an effect for the normal pattern.

  Here, the timer input process in the normal pattern will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1601, a process for setting the outline of the special reservation notice is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the normal pattern is selected as the special hold notice, the outline of the special hold notice as the normal pattern is first set, and then the time display area GE at the start of the special hold notice. The detailed predetermined set time displayed as the time display image Gp is set. In step S1601, as an outline of the hold notice to be set, the hold memory number N (secondary hold memory number SN) immediately before reception of the current hold command, that is, immediately before the hold information is acquired, and various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 are displayed. On the basis of the special holding counter TK provided in the table 243 and the special holding notice table (FIG. 27A) at the time of jackpot stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, When a special hold notice is executed, a rough length (short time, medium time, long time) of a predetermined set time is set. The special holding counter TK is a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in a predetermined cycle in order within a range of 0 to 999, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Specifically, in the special reservation notice table at the time of jackpot, as shown in FIG. 27 (a), when the storage number N immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 0 (hold storage after acquisition of the current hold information) When the number N is 1) and the special hold counter TK is 0 to 699, the special hold notice is set not to be executed. Further, when the number N of reserved storage immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 0 and the special hold counter TK is 700 to 999, a special hold notice is executed, and among these, the special hold counter TK Is set to be a medium time when the value is 700 to 799, and is set to be a short time when the value is 800 to 999.

  Further, when the number N of reserved storage immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 1 (when the number N of hold storage after acquisition of the current hold information is 2), the special hold counter TK is 0 to 399. In some cases, the special hold notice is set not to be executed. Further, when the number of stored memories N immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 1 and the special hold counter TK is 400 to 999, a special hold notice is executed, and among these, the special hold counter TK Is set to be a long time when it is 400 to 499, a medium time when it is 500 to 699, and a short time when it is 700 to 999.

  When the reserved storage number N immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 2 (when the hold storage number N after acquisition of the current hold information is 3) and the special hold counter TK is 0 to 299 Is set not to execute a special hold notice. Further, when the number N of stored storage immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 2 and the special hold counter TK is 300 to 999, a special hold notice is executed, and among these, the special hold counter TK Is set to be a long time when it is 300 to 599, a medium time when it is 600 to 899, and a short time when it is 900 to 999.

  When the reserved storage number N immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 3 (when the hold storage number N after acquisition of the current hold information is 4) and the special hold counter TK is 0 to 199 Is set not to execute a special hold notice. In addition, when the number of stored memories N immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 3, and the special hold counter TK is 200 to 999, a special hold notice is executed, and among these, the special hold counter TK Is set to be a long time when it is 200 to 549, a medium time when it is 550 to 899, and a short time when it is 900 to 999.

  That is, in the special reservation notice table, the probability of executing the special reservation notice is set to be lower as the number N of stored memories immediately before obtaining the reservation information is smaller. In other words, the larger the number of stored hold information, the higher the probability of executing the special hold notice. The greater the number of the hold information, the longer the time from the start to the end of the special hold notice may be, so the possibility that the special condition is satisfied increases. Thus, by doing as described above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a special reservation notice that is difficult to satisfy the special condition.

  In the timer input process in the normal pattern (FIG. 26), after setting the outline of the hold notice in step S1601, whether or not to execute the special hold notice in step S1602 based on the processing result in step S1601 is determined. judge. If it is determined not to be executed, the timer input process is terminated as it is. If it is determined to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1603, where the rough set time set in step S1601, the time selection counter JK provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244, and the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 are stored. Based on the stored jackpot time selection table (FIG. 27 (b)), details of a predetermined set time in the special hold notice are set. The time selection counter JK is, for example, a loop counter that is incremented one by one in a predetermined cycle in the range of 0 to 19 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  After setting the detailed set time in step S1603, in step S1604, numerical information corresponding to the set time set in step S1603 is input to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244. Execute the process. After executing the process of step S1604, the timer input process is terminated. The timer counter T is a counter for managing subtraction update of a predetermined set time in the special hold notice.

  Returning to the description of the effect setting process when the time can be specified (FIG. 24), after the process of step S1503 is executed, whether or not the special hold notice is set to be executed in the process of step S1503 in step S1504. Determine whether. When the non-execution is set, the effect setting process is terminated as it is. If it is set to execute, the process proceeds to step S1505.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the process for determining whether or not to execute the special reservation notice (step S1601 in the timer input process at the normal pattern in step S1503), the process for setting the special reservation notice effect pattern (step S1501). In addition, the configuration is performed after step S1502). Here, as a configuration of the normal effect setting process in the gaming machine field, after performing the process of whether or not to execute the effect, if the effect is to be executed, then set the effect pattern of the effect A configuration for performing the processing is generally performed. This is because if the effect pattern setting process is performed even when the effect is not executed, unnecessary processing is performed correspondingly, and the processing may be complicated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, after the effect pattern setting process, a process for determining whether or not to execute the effect is performed. If the configuration is such that the presence / absence of the performance is determined at the initial stage, the difference in the number of processes between the case where the performance is not performed and the case where the performance is performed may be large. In this case, the difference in time required for processing also increases, and even in the case of production execution, there is a possibility that the presence or absence of production execution will be realized before the production occurs because of a delay in the production timing. . If it does so, we are anxious about the effect of the presentation which prepared with much effort being unable to be produced suitably. Therefore, there is a possibility that the presence / absence of execution will be realized before the production starts by reducing the difference in the number of processes and processing time by determining the presence / absence of production execution after setting the production pattern. The effect of improving the degree of attention by executing the special reservation notice can be suitably achieved.

  If it is determined in step S1504 that a special reservation notice is to be executed, the process advances to step S1505 to acquire a jackpot subtraction pattern table. As shown in FIG. 28 (a), the big hit subtraction pattern table includes a default subtraction, a shift subtraction, and a specific timing subtraction as subtraction patterns of the values input to the timer counter T in step S1604. Any one of them is set to be selected based on the value of the subtraction counter GK provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244.

  The default subtraction is a method in which the subtraction of the time display image Gp is subtracted with the passage of actual time in the special hold notice. For example, when 1 sec elapses, the display of the time display image Gp is also subtracted by 1 sec and updated. The The subtraction unit is 0.01 sec corresponding to the minimum display unit of the time display image Gp. The subtraction at the time of shifting is a subtraction method in which a predetermined number is subtracted at the timing when one game round is completed and the holding information is shifted to a lower area in the holding ball storage area 232, and when this subtraction at the time of shifting is selected. Is subtracted in addition to the default subtraction. The specific timing subtraction is a subtraction method that subtracts a predetermined number based on the fact that the display of the time display image Gp has reached a predetermined display time that has been determined in advance and has reached a specific timing, and when this specific timing subtraction is selected. Is subtracted in addition to the default subtraction.

  The subtraction counter GK is a loop counter that is incremented one by one in a predetermined cycle in order within a range of 0 to 999, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. More specifically, for the subtraction pattern table, the default subtraction is selected when the subtraction counter GK is 0 to 249, the subtraction when shifting is selected when it is 250 to 699, and is specified when it is 700 to 999. Timing subtraction is set to be selected. In step S1506, a subtraction pattern for the timer counter T is set based on these parameters.

  After executing the processing in step S1506, it is determined in step S1507 whether the subtraction pattern set in step S1506 is subtraction during shift. In the case of subtraction at the time of shift, processing for storing the flag at the time of shift in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 244 is executed in step S1508. The shift flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to recognize that the shift subtraction is selected as the subtraction pattern.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1507, or after the processing of step S1508 is executed, it is determined in step S1509 whether the subtraction pattern set in step S1505 is a specific timing subtraction. In the case of specific timing subtraction, processing for storing specific timing flags in various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 244 is executed in step S1510. The specific timing flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to recognize that the specific timing subtraction is selected as the subtraction pattern.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1509, or after the processing of step S1510 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1511. In step S1511, the special hold command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. This special hold command includes information on the effect contents of the special hold notice set in each of the above processes, and is output to the display control device 212 by a command output process activated at a predetermined cycle. The display control device 212 that has received the special hold command controls the symbol display device 41 so that the special hold notice is displayed on the display screen G based on the information included in the command. After executing the process of step S1511, the effect setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1502 that the current special hold notice effect pattern is not a normal pattern, the process advances to step S1512 to determine whether or not it is a time specifying pattern. If it is a time specifying pattern, the process advances to step S1513 to execute timer input processing for the time specifying pattern.

  In this timer input process, based on each hold information stored in the hold storage area 250, hold information corresponding to the hold command received this time, and the remaining variable display time in the game currently being executed. The time from the start to the end of the special hold notice is grasped, and the timer counter T is set based on the grasped information.

  Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 29, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether there is unconfirmed hold information in the hold storage area 250 or not. As a specific configuration for confirming unconfirmed pending information, a configuration similar to the configuration in step S1401 can be considered. If there is unconfirmed hold information, the fluctuation display time table at the time of losing is acquired in step S1702. In this embodiment, when there are a plurality of holding information corresponding to any jackpot result in the holding ball storage area 232 (holding storage area 250), an event occurs in which the special holding notice based on these jackpot results overlaps. It has a configuration that does not. In addition, when there are a plurality of pieces of hold information corresponding to the jackpot results, the special hold notice can be executed only for the hold information that is subject to the determination of success / failure first. Although the process for doing so will be described later, since the setting is made in this way, each hold information grasped in the timer input process at the time specific pattern is an outlier result. Therefore, in step S1702, a process of obtaining a deviation display time table (see FIG. 13B) at the time of deviation is executed. In step S1703, processing for grasping the variable display time of the hold information based on the variable display time table acquired in step S1702 is executed. In the subsequent step S1704, a process of adding the variable display time grasped in step S1703 to the timer counter T is executed.

  After executing the process of step S1704, the process returns to step S1701 to determine whether there is unconfirmed pending information. If there is, the processes of steps S1702 to S1704 are repeated. If there is no unconfirmed hold information, the process proceeds to step S1705, and a variable display time table (see FIG. 13 (a)) at the time of jackpot is acquired to grasp the variable display time corresponding to the hold information acquired this time. Execute the process. In the subsequent step S1706, the effect pattern is grasped based on the variation display time table acquired in step S1705, and the time until the high-speed variation display of the lower symbol row Z3 is terminated in the game times related to the hold information is grasped. Execute the process.

  Here, in this embodiment, from the information on the game result and the information on the variation display time, at least the time pattern until the high-speed variation display of the lower symbol row Z3 is completed among the effect patterns of the corresponding game times. It is possible to grasp. Specifically, in this configuration, an effect pattern table for determining an effect pattern for each game time is stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 of the effect control device 82. And this effect pattern table is set so that the pattern of time until the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol sequence Z3 is completed is uniquely determined from the information of the game result and the fluctuation display time information. In step S1706, the time until the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3 is completed is grasped based on the effect pattern table. In addition, in this effect pattern table, in addition to the time until the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends, detailed effect patterns for each game time are also defined. And in the variation start process in the variation display control process described later, the stop result of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is set based on the information on the presence / absence of reach occurrence, the information on the variation display time, the information on the game result, etc. Based on the stop result information and the variable display time information, the details of the corresponding effect pattern are read out from the effect pattern table and set as the effect pattern in the current game round.

  That is, the process of step S1706 is a process of specifying the effect pattern of the game times at a timing earlier than the start of the game times, and the effect pattern setting process (variation start process) performed at the start of the game times is the game. This is performed at a timing earlier than the start timing of the times. By providing such a configuration, it is possible to produce an effect according to the effect pattern of the game times at a timing earlier than the game times. And in this embodiment, since it is set as the structure which specifies an effect pattern at the timing before the start of the game times using the effect pattern table for setting an effect pattern at the time of the start of game times, The structure for specifying first is simplified.

  Note that the configuration for specifying the effect pattern of the game times at a timing prior to the start of the game times is not limited to the above, and may be another configuration. For example, the effect pattern table may be prepared separately for a table for time until the high-speed fluctuation display ends and a table in which a detailed effect pattern is set. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which specifies not all but a part of effect pattern of game times at the previous timing. In addition, the time until the high-speed fluctuation display is completed using a counter or the like is determined by lottery, etc., and the lottery is performed at the previous timing. It is good also as a structure which determines an effect pattern. In other words, as long as the production pattern is determined at the start of the game round, it is only necessary to be able to identify at least a part of the production pattern to be determined at the earlier timing. If it is a configuration that is determined at a timing earlier than that, it is possible to specify the effect pattern determined at the earlier timing, and at the start of the game times, it is configured to set the effect based on the determined effect pattern Good.

  In step S1707, processing for adding the time grasped in step S1706 to the timer counter T is executed.

  After executing the process of step S1707, in step S1708, a process of grasping the remaining variation display time of the currently executed game time is executed. By the way, the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 are provided with a progress counter for grasping the progress status of the fluctuation display time of the game time being executed, and numerical information corresponding to the fluctuation display time is displayed at the start of the game time. Input to the progress counter. The progress counter is subtracted and updated every predetermined period, and becomes 0 at the end of the game. In step S1708, by grasping the numerical information of this progress counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining variation display time of the game times being executed. After performing the process of step S1708, a process of adding the remaining time grasped in step S1708 to the timer counter T is executed in step S1709.

  After executing the process of step S1709, after executing a predetermined time adjustment process in step S1710, the timer input process is terminated. In this predetermined time adjustment process, adjustment is performed by increasing or decreasing the predetermined set time specified in steps S1701 to S1709. In other words, by increasing or decreasing the specified actual time by lottery or the like, it is possible to give randomness to whether or not a predetermined set time elapses before the end of high-speed fluctuation, that is, whether or not a special condition is satisfied.

  Note that the time to increase / decrease in step S1710 is not limited to the configuration in which the time is randomly determined by lottery or the like. For example, it may be determined according to the game result of the hold information and the type of jackpot that are subject to special hold notice. Alternatively, it may be determined according to the game situation (for example, the number of reserved items or the lottery mode). The increase / decrease in step S1710 may be determined at random by lottery or the like, or may be determined according to the game situation during execution of the special reservation notice. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to reflect a game situation more with respect to possibility of establishment of special conditions, and it can suppress giving an impression like what is called a race.

  Returning to the description of the effect setting process when the time can be specified (FIG. 24), after executing the timer input process at the time specifying pattern in step S1513, the special hold notice command is output and set in step S1511. The effect setting process ends. If it is determined in step S1512 that the pattern is not a time specific pattern but a premier pattern, in step S1514, a timer input process for the premier pattern is executed. After the process of step S1514, after performing said step S1511, this effect setting process is complete | finished.

  In the timer input process at the time of the premier pattern in step S1514, which of the plurality of premier effects to be executed is set, and each process corresponding to the set effect is performed. Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30, first, a premier effect lottery process is executed in step S1801. In the premier effect lottery process, the premier pattern effect selection table (FIG. 25B) stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 and the premier counter lot PK for the premier effect lottery from the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 , And set which premier effect to execute. In the performance selection table at the time of the premier pattern, as the premier effect, the display time at the start of the special hold notice and the confirmation time display effect that makes it possible to grasp that it is a jackpot result, and the time at the predetermined end during subtraction A tail specific change effect in which a jackpot finalizing effect is performed and a one-shot reverse effect in which a special condition is forcibly established by performing a large subtraction at a predetermined timing during subtraction are set. The premier counter PK is, for example, a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in a predetermined cycle in order within a range of 0 to 999 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In the effect selection table at the time of the premier pattern, the case where the premiere counter PK is 0 to 333 corresponds to the fixed time display effect, the case where it is 334 to 666 corresponds to the tail specific change effect, and may be 667 to 999. It is set to correspond to a one-shot reverse effect.

  After performing the effect lottery process in step S1801, it is determined based on the result of the process whether or not the one-shot reverse effect is set in step S1802. The one-shot reversal effect is the timing before the end of the special hold notice as the predetermined timing during the subtraction as described above, for example, the start of the game time of the hold information subject to the special hold notice Sometimes, it is an effect that the special condition is forcibly established by subtracting until the set time becomes zero. If it is set to this one-shot reverse effect, the one-time reverse flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 244 so that it is possible to grasp that the MPU 242 is set to this one-time reverse effect in step S1803. Execute the process of storing

  Note that the execution timing of the one-shot reverse effect is not limited to the above as long as it is the timing before the end of the special reservation notice. For example, it may be before the start of the game of the hold information subject to the special hold notice (during the game of the hold information digested before the hold information of interest). Moreover, the timing at which new hold information is acquired during execution of the special hold notice may be used. However, the closer to the end of the special hold notice, the higher the unexpectedness when a one-shot reverse effect occurs.

  In the subsequent step S1804, an effect time setting process for one reversal is performed. In this effect time setting process, a time selection table for the one-time reversal effect is obtained from the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, and the time corresponding to the number N of reserved memories immediately before acquisition of the current hold information is grasped. As shown in FIG. 25 (c), in the time selection table at the time of one reversal, the production time is set corresponding to the reserved memory number N, and the production time becomes longer as the reserved memory number N increases. Is set. A plurality of effect times are set so that the selected effect times can be different even with the same number of reserved memories, and which effect time is set is randomly selected by lottery or the like. These performance times are set to be longer than the variable display time that is usually selected easily in one game time. When the advance notice is executed, the special condition is set to be difficult to be satisfied only by normal default subtraction. In addition, it is good also as a structure where a special condition is not materialized only by default subtraction regardless of which production time is selected.

  After executing the process of step S1804, a process of inputting the time grasped in step S1804 to the timer counter T is executed in step S1805. After executing the process of step S1805, the timer input process is terminated.

  When it is not a one-shot reverse effect in step S1802, it is determined in step S1806 whether or not the effect set in step S1801 is a tail specific change effect. As described above, in the end specific change effect, the display of the predetermined time display image Gp being subtracted is “7” in the present embodiment as the predetermined end, and the display of the time display image Gp is “X7.77” (X Is an arbitrary number) at a timing (also referred to as tail specifying timing in the following description) so that a jackpot finalizing effect occurs. When it is determined in step S1806 that the tail specific change effect is set, in step S1807, various flag storage areas of the RAM 244 are stored so that it can be understood that the MPU 242 is set to the tail specific change effect. A process of storing the tail specific change flag in 234 is executed.

  Note that the end specifying timing is not limited to the above, but for example, “X7.70”, “X7.00”, “XY.70”, and “XY.Z7” (Y and Z are arbitrary numbers). The predetermined end does not have to be a rounded eye. Further, the predetermined end is not limited to one type and may be a plurality of types. In this case, the number of times that the tail specifying timing occurs can be increased.

  In the subsequent step S1808, an effect time setting process for the end specific change is performed. In this effect time setting process, the time selection table at the time of the end specific change effect is acquired from the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, and the time corresponding to the reserved storage number N immediately before acquisition of the current hold information is grasped. As shown in FIG. 25 (d), in the time selection table at the time of the end specific change, the production time is set in correspondence with the number N of stored memories, and the production time becomes longer as the number N of held memories increases. Is set. A plurality of effect times are set so that the selected effect times can be different even with the same number of reserved memories, and which effect time is set is randomly selected by lottery or the like. These performance times are set so that the timing at which the predetermined end is included is included at least once. Specifically, an effect time shorter than a predetermined end time is not set. In addition, the probability that there is a plurality of tail specific timings that are predetermined tails during subtraction is set to be higher than the probability that the tail specific timing is singular. More specifically, for example, when the end specific timing is “XY.Z7”, the probability that “XY.Z8 to XY.Z9” is selected selects “XY.Z0 to XY.Z6”. It is set to be higher than the probability.

  If an effect time with a plurality of tail specific timings is selected during subtraction in step S1808, a process of randomly setting which timing to generate the jackpot final effect is performed by lottery or the like. In addition, you may set so that the probability that a jackpot finalizing effect will generate | occur | produce becomes higher in the timing with the late generation timing among several end specific timings. In this way, the probability of going through the tail specific timing multiple times before the jackpot finalizing effect is performed, and the number of times the player pays attention to whether or not the jackpot finalizing effect is performed at this tail specific timing. Can be expensive. Also, in this case, if a roll effect that steps up each time the end specific timing is passed, the degree of attention toward the later timing can be more suitably increased. In addition, as a jackpot finalizing effect, the subtraction of the time display image Gp may be terminated at the end specifying timing, and the subtraction may not be performed thereafter. In this way, it is considered that the player expects the subtraction to end at the end specific timing, and the degree of attention to the special reservation notice can be increased. As a timing to end the subtraction, when there are a plurality of end specific timings as described above, the value is more suggestive of a hit like “XY.77” than “XY.Z7”, The timing may correspond to a value that suggests an advantage to the player as compared to other values, such as an odd number (corresponding to a probable jackpot result) rather than an even number (usually corresponding to a jackpot result). Further, the time display image Gp may be enlarged at the end specifying timing, the color may be changed to a conspicuous color, or the shape may be sharpened to enhance the time display image Gp. By doing in this way, interest in time display image Gp can be raised more. It is also possible to combine this highlighting with a configuration that stops subtraction as described above. In this case, it may be configured to start from a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds before) the end specifying timing (timing at which subtraction can be completed), and in this way, the end specifying timing (timing at which subtraction can be completed) approaches. The player can easily recognize that the time display image Gp has changed.

  After executing the process of step S1808, in step S1809, a process of inputting the time grasped in step S1808 to the timer counter T is executed. After executing the process of step S1809, the timer input process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1806 that the tail specific change effect is not set, the process proceeds to step S1810. The case where a negative determination is made in step S1806 is a case where the fixed time display effect is set as the premier effect. For example, “77.77”, “7.77”, and “3.41” are used as the fixed time display effects as the fixed time that can be recognized as a jackpot result at the display time at the start of the special hold notice. ”Is set (see FIG. 25 (e)), and one of these fixed times is displayed at the start of the special hold notice, so that the player becomes the target of this special hold notice. It is possible to grasp that the hold information that is held is any jackpot result.

  Needless to say, the type of the fixed time in the fixed time display is not limited to the above. Further, as in the case of the tail specific change effect, a configuration in which the subtraction is not performed while the fixed time display is performed may be performed, or a time display image Gp may be changed (emphasized) in the fixed time display.

  In step S1810, processing for storing a fixed time display flag in various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 244 is executed so that the MPU 242 can grasp that the fixed time display effect is set. In continuing step S1811, the production time setting process for a fixed time display is performed. In this effect time setting process, a time selection table for a fixed time display effect is acquired from the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, and a fixed time to be displayed this time is selected. Which set time is set among a plurality of set times is randomly determined by lottery or the like. Note that a plurality of jackpot results may be set in association with the fixed times to be displayed. By doing this, it is possible not only to grasp that it is a jackpot result by displaying the confirmed time, but also to grasp the type thereof, and to more appropriately pay attention to the confirmed time display. It becomes possible to raise.

  After executing the process of step S1811, the process of inputting the time grasped in step S1811 to the timer counter T is executed in step S1812. After executing the process of step S1812, this timer input process ends.

<Direction setting process when time cannot be specified>
Next, the effect setting process when the time cannot be specified in step S1305 in the special reservation notice setting process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  The effect setting process when the time cannot be specified is substantially the same as the effect setting process when the time can be specified. That is, first, in step S1901, the special reservation notice table when the time cannot be specified is acquired from the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 among the special reservation notice table at the time of big hit. In step S1901, the effect pattern counter EK is acquired from the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244. In the special reservation notice table when the time cannot be specified, as shown in FIG. 25A, a normal pattern and a premier pattern are set as the contents of the special reservation notice. In other words, in the special reservation notice table when the time cannot be specified, the time specification pattern is set not to be selected as compared with the special reservation notice table when the time can be specified.

  After setting the special reservation notice effect pattern in step S1901, it is determined in step S1902 whether or not the normal pattern is set. Similar to the process of, after performing the processes of steps S1903 to S1911, the effect setting process is terminated. If it is determined in step S1902 that the normal pattern is not set, the premier pattern is set. In this case, the same process as in step S1514 is executed in step S1912. After performing the process of step S1911, the effect setting process is terminated.

<Rendering setting process at the time of departure>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of departure from step S1306 in the special hold notice setting process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  The effect setting process at the time of losing is substantially the same as the process in the case where the special pattern special hold notice is set in each effect setting process (step S1304, step S1305) at the time of the big hit. That is, in step S2001, the reserved storage number N immediately before reception of the current hold command, that is, immediately before acquisition of hold information, the special hold counter TK provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244, and the various table storages in the ROM 243. The process of acquiring the special reservation notice table (FIG. 33A) at the time of disconnection stored in the area 245 is executed. In step S2002, a process for setting an outline of the special reservation notice is executed.

  In the special hold notice table at the time of detachment, as shown in FIG. 33 (a), when the hold storage number N immediately before acquisition of hold information is 0 (the hold storage number N after acquisition of hold information this time is 1). If the special reservation counter TK is 0 to 679, the special reservation notice is set not to be executed. Further, when the number of stored memories N immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 0 and the special hold counter TK is 800 to 999, a special hold notice is executed, and among these, the special hold counter TK Is set to be a long time when it is 800 to 949, a medium time when it is 950 to 989, and a short time when it is 990 to 999.

  Further, when the number N of reserved storage immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 1 (when the number N of hold storage after acquisition of the current hold information is 2), the special hold counter TK is 0 to 599. In some cases, the special hold notice is set not to be executed. Further, when the number of stored memories N immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 1, and the special hold counter TK is 600 to 999, a special hold notice is executed, and among these, the special hold counter TK Is set to be a long time when it is 600 to 799, a medium time when it is 800 to 969, and a short time when it is 970 to 999.

  When the reserved memory count N immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 2 (when the hold memory count N after acquisition of the current hold information is 3) and the special hold counter TK is 0 to 399 Is set not to execute a special hold notice. In addition, when the number of stored memories N immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 2, and the special hold counter TK is 400 to 999, a special hold notice is executed, and among these, the special hold counter TK Is set to be a long time when it is 400 to 699, a medium time when it is 700 to 949, and a short time when it is 950 to 999.

  When the reserved storage number N immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 3 (when the hold storage number N after acquisition of the current hold information is 4) and the special hold counter TK is 0 to 199 Is set not to execute a special hold notice. In addition, when the number of stored memories N immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 3, and the special hold counter TK is 200 to 999, a special hold notice is executed, and among these, the special hold counter TK Is set to be a long time when it is 200 to 599, a medium time when it is 600 to 949, and a short time when it is 950 to 999.

  That is, when the special hold notice table at the time of losing and the big hit is compared, the probability of being set to non-execution at the time of losing is higher. In addition, a longer time is more easily selected as the predetermined set time when it is off, and as a result, even when the special hold notice is executed, it is less likely that the special condition is satisfied when it is off.

  After executing the process of step S2002, in the subsequent step S2003, it is determined whether or not to execute the special hold notice based on the result of the process of step S2002. If not executed, the effect setting process is terminated as it is. When executing, in step S2004, the process for setting the details of the set time is executed in the same manner as the process in step S1603. That is, in step S2004, a special hold is made based on the rough setting time set in step S2002, the time selection counter JK in the RAM 244, and the time selection table at the time of removal from the ROM 243 (FIG. 33B). Set the details of the predetermined set time in the notice. After setting the detailed set time in step S2004, in step S2005, a process of inputting numerical information corresponding to the set time set in step S2004 is executed to the timer counter T of the RAM 244.

  In the subsequent step S2005, a subtraction pattern table for removal is acquired. As shown in FIG. 28 (a), the subtraction pattern table for losing is specified as default subtraction, subtraction at shift, based on the value of the subtraction counter GK in the RAM 244, similarly to the subtraction pattern table for jackpot. The timing subtraction is set to be selected.

  More specifically, with respect to the subtraction pattern table for outliers, the default subtraction is selected when the subtraction counter GK is 0 to 749, and the subtraction upon shift is selected when it is 750 to 874, which is 875 to 999. In this case, the specific timing subtraction is set to be selected. That is, the probability that the default subtraction is selected is set higher when it is out of the big hit. In other words, there is a higher probability that the subtraction at the time of shift or the specific timing subtraction is selected at the time of jackpot than at the time of loss.

  In step S2006, the subtraction pattern of the timer counter T is set based on the values of the subtraction pattern table and the subtraction counter GK acquired in step S2005.

  The processing from step S2007 to step S2011 is the same as the processing from step S1507 to step S1511 described above, and the processing when the subtraction at shift or specific timing subtraction is selected (processing to store the corresponding flag) is executed.

  After performing the process of step S2011, after performing the process which adds and updates "1" to the hold notice counter YK in step S2012, this production | generation setting process is complete | finished.

  Returning to the description of the hold control command handling process (FIG. 19), after executing the special hold notice setting process in step S1205, the process proceeds to step S1206. In step S1206, it is determined whether the hold command received this time corresponds to any jackpot result. If it corresponds to any of the jackpot results, the process proceeds to step S1207, and a process of updating by adding “3” to the hold notice counter YK is executed. As a result, a negative determination is made in the process of step S1204.

  That is, when the hold information corresponding to any jackpot result is stored, the special hold notice is not executed for the hold information digested after the hold information. As described above, the special hold notice is subject to the special hold notice based on the time from the start of the special hold notice to the predetermined timing in the game times related to the hold information. It is an effect whether or not to change the holding image related to the hold information. If any jackpot result is included in the hold information digested from the start to the end, before the end An open / close execution mode is included. That is, depending on the length of the opening / closing execution mode, the possibility that the special condition is satisfied is extremely high, and the interest may be reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to avoid such a case, when the opening / closing execution mode is performed during execution of the special hold notice, the special hold notice is not performed.

  However, even if the opening / closing execution mode is performed during the special hold notice, if the setting time in the special hold notice is not subtracted during the open / close execution mode, the possibility of establishment of the special condition will be extremely increased. In such a case, it may be possible to avoid a decrease in interest even if a special reservation notice is executed. By doing in this way, it is also possible to raise the frequency with which special reservation notice is performed.

  In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the special hold notice is performed when the opening / closing execution mode and the special hold notice overlap, and the special hold notice is subtracted even in the open / close execution mode. In this case, for example, if the probability that the special condition is established is set by using the length of time during which the opening / closing execution mode is performed, not only the length of the variable display time during game play but also the opening / closing execution mode It can be a new effect that the probability of establishment of the special condition of the hold information varies depending on the length. In particular, in the opening / closing execution mode, the execution length may vary depending on not only the setting on the gaming machine side but also the game mode of the player. Specifically, in the open / close execution mode, when the number of winnings to the big winning opening 32a reaches the winning upper limit number of each round, the round ends. Duration may vary. Therefore, the game can be a novel game in which the special condition is more easily established as the timing of reaching the upper limit number of winnings by the player's operation is delayed. Thereby, the opening / closing execution mode can be fully enjoyed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1204 or step S1206, or after the processing in step S1207 is executed, the hold increasing command processing is executed in step S1208, and then the hold control command response processing is terminated. In this process, light emission control of the hold light emitting unit 45 is performed in response to the increase in hold information, and a command corresponding to the increase in hold information is output to the display control device 212. This command includes information on the hold image determined in step S1203, information on the special hold notice determined in step S1205, and information on the secondary hold storage number SN. Based on the received command, the display control device 212 reads data corresponding to the corresponding holding image from the holding image data storage area stored in the character ROM 256, and holds the unit holding corresponding to the secondary holding storage number SN. The symbol display device 41 is controlled to display on the display areas Ga1 to Ga4.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1201, the process proceeds to step S1209. In step S1209, it is determined whether a shift command is received. If a shift command has not been received, the hold control command handling process is terminated. If a shift command has been received, the process advances to step S1210 to execute a process of subtracting 1 from the secondary reserved storage number SN.

  In a succeeding step S1211, it is determined whether or not a shift subtraction flag is stored. The subtraction flag at the time of shift is a flag that is stored when subtraction at the time of shift is selected as the subtraction pattern in the special reservation notice as described above. If this flag is stored, the process advances to step S1212 to execute a subtraction process at the time of shift. This shift subtraction process will be described later in detail.

  When the shift subtraction flag is not stored in step S1211, or after executing the process of step S1212, the process proceeds to step S1213. In step S1213, a shift process is executed. In the shift process, the data in each storage area in the storage area for holding 250 is shifted. That is, in the shift process, the hold information stored in each storage area of the hold storage area 250 is shifted from the upper area to the lower area. In the shift process, the light emission control of the hold light emitting unit 45 is performed in response to the decrease in the hold information, and a command corresponding to the decrease in the hold information is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 so as to change the display of the corresponding unit hold display areas Ga1 to Gs4 based on the received command. After executing the process of step S1213, the hold control command response process is terminated.

<Special hold notice control process>
Next, the special hold notice control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 34, in the special hold notice control process, it is determined whether or not the special hold notice is being executed in step S2101. If it is being executed, a predetermined setting is made in step S2102. A timer management process that is a process related to time subtraction is executed, and a hold display process that is a process related to the hold image P is executed in step S2103. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, or after executing the process of step S2103, the special hold notice control process is terminated.

  Hereinafter, the timer management process and the hold display process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In the timer management process, as shown in FIG. 35, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not an elapsed flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. The elapsed flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that the special condition is satisfied because the timer counter T is “0”. If the elapsed flag is stored, the timer management process is terminated as it is.

  If the elapsed flag is not stored, the process advances to step S2202 to determine whether or not a subtraction end flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. The subtraction end flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to know that the subtraction of the predetermined set time in the special hold notice has ended without special conditions being satisfied. If the subtraction end flag is stored, the timer management process is terminated as it is.

  If the subtraction end flag is not stored, the process advances to step S2203 to execute timer subtraction processing. In this process, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting “1”. In the subsequent step S2204, the subtraction command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. This subtraction command includes the information of the timer counter T updated in the above step S2203, and is output to the display control device 212 by command output processing activated in the MPU 242 at a predetermined cycle. Based on the reception of the subtraction command, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 reads an image corresponding to the information of the timer counter T included in the subtraction command from the character ROM 256, and displays the time display area GE in the special hold notice. The symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the time display image Gp is updated.

  In a succeeding step S2205, it is determined whether or not a specific timing subtraction flag is stored. If the specific timing subtraction flag is stored and the specific timing subtraction is selected as the subtraction pattern, it is determined in step S2206 whether or not it is time to perform the specific timing subtraction. As already described, the specific timing subtraction is a subtraction method in which a predetermined number is subtracted based on the fact that the display of the time display image Gp has reached a predetermined display time that has been determined in advance and has reached a specific timing.

  As shown in FIG. 28C, the specific timing subtraction table stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 performs a subtraction with a specific timing that is a predetermined display time, a subtraction probability at the specific timing. In this case, the subtraction time is set for each game result of the hold information that triggered the special hold notice. Specifically, regardless of the game result, the case where the setting time of the special hold notice is any of the remaining 10 sec, 20 sec, 40 sec and 60 sec is set as the specific timing. In addition, the subtraction probability is uniformly set to 25% when the game result is a jackpot result at any specific timing, and when the game result is a missed result, the specific timing The winning probability is set to be lower as the time becomes slower (as the specific timing has less remaining time). Regardless of the game result, the subtraction time is set so that the subtraction time is shorter as the specific timing is delayed (the specific timing with the remaining time of the set time is shorter).

  In step S2206, the specific timing subtraction table is acquired and it is determined whether or not it is the specific timing (remaining 10 sec, 20 sec, 40 sec, or 60 sec). If it is the specific timing, a subtraction lottery process is executed in step S2207. In this process, a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform subtraction at the current specific timing based on the subtraction probability of the specific timing subtraction table of the ROM 243. In step S2208, it is determined whether or not the subtraction lottery is won based on the processing result in step S2207. If the subtraction lottery is won, timer subtraction processing is executed in step S2209. In this process, a process of subtracting a numerical value corresponding to the current subtraction time set in the specific timing subtraction table from the current timer counter T is performed. In the subsequent step S2210, the specific subtraction command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The specific subtraction command includes the subtraction time subtracted in step S2209 and the information of the timer counter T after the subtraction. The output mode of the specific subtraction command and the processing on the display control device 212 side when the subtraction command is received are the same as in the subtraction command described above.

  As described above, in this embodiment, different commands are provided for each subtraction opportunity, such as outputting information at the time of normal default subtraction as a command at the time of subtraction, and outputting information at the time of specific timing subtraction as a command at the time of specific subtraction. . As a result, since the display control device 212 can grasp the subtraction opportunity by grasping the type of command, the processing configuration can be simplified in setting the effect corresponding to the subtraction opportunity. be able to. However, from the viewpoint of reducing the storage capacity on the side of the effect control device 82 by reducing the types of commands to be set or reducing the number of input / output commands between the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212, these commands May be configured in common. Specifically, in step S2210, the subtraction command set in step S2204 may be updated. For example, if the information obtained by subtracting “1” from the timer counter T in step S2204 (step S2203) is set as the subtraction command, the information obtained by subtracting “1” from the information subtracted at a specific timing (step S2210) The information regarding the subtraction value combined with S2209) is reset to the subtraction command. In this way, the subtraction command can be used at any subtraction opportunity, and the number of commands set in one timer management process is only one, and the number of input / output commands is set as described above. It can be reduced more than the configuration.

  When a negative determination is made in any of step S2205, step S2206, and step S2208, or after executing the process of step S2210, the process proceeds to step S2211. In step S2211, it is determined whether or not the timer counter T has reached “0”. When the timer counter T becomes “0”, the process of storing the elapsed flag in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 is executed in step S2212, and the timer management process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2211 that the timer counter T is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S2213. In step S2213, it is determined whether or not either the tail specific change flag or the one-time reverse rotation flag is stored in the RAM 244. If any one of the flags is stored, it is determined in step S2214 whether or not it is the performance execution timing corresponding to the stored flag. Specifically, when the tail specific change flag is stored, the tail specific change effect is set as the current effect pattern. In step S2214, the timing (time display area) at which this tail specific change effect is to be executed. It is determined whether or not the GE display is “X7.77”. Further, when the one-time reverse rotation flag is stored, the one-time reverse rotation effect is set as the current effect pattern. In step S2214, the timing at which this one-time reverse rotation effect is to be executed (the target of the special hold notice) It is determined whether or not it is the game information start timing of the held information.

  If affirmative determination is made in step S2214 and it is the execution timing of the effect corresponding to the stored flag, the process proceeds to step S2115 to execute effect setting processing for executing the corresponding effect. In this process, the timer counter T is set to “0”, and when the tail specific change flag is stored, the tail specific change effect is executed, and when the one-time reverse rotation flag is stored. The display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled so as to execute a one-shot reverse effect, and a corresponding effect is executed on the symbol display device 41 by outputting a command to the display control device 212. To. Thereafter, after the elapsed flag is stored in step S2212, the timer management process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S2213 or step S2214, the timer management process is terminated as it is.

  As described above, in the timer management process, a periodic subtraction process of the timer counter T, a subtraction process at a specific timing, and a process in a premier effect such as a fixed time display effect, a tail specific change effect, and a one-shot reverse effect. Run. If the special condition is satisfied, an elapsed flag is stored. In the hold display process (step S2103) in the special hold notice control process (FIG. 34), a process based on the fact that this elapsed flag has been stored (the special condition has been established) is performed.

  As already described, in the present embodiment, as a subtraction pattern, subtraction upon shifting is set in addition to default subtraction and specific timing subtraction. Therefore, prior to the description of the hold display process, the shift subtraction process for the shift subtraction will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The subtraction process at the time of the shift is a process that is executed based on the reception of the shift command from the main control device 81 in the hold control command corresponding process (FIG. 19) (step S1212).

  In the shift subtraction process, it is determined in step S2301 whether or not a shift winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. The shift winning flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to know that subtraction at the time of shifting has already been performed. If it is determined in step S2301 that the shift winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2302.

  In step S2302, subtraction lottery processing for shifting is executed. In this process, the shift subtraction table is acquired from the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 and the lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244, and whether or not the subtraction is executed at the current shift is selected by lottery. . As shown in FIG. 28 (b), the shift time subtraction table is based on the number of hold after the shift and the game result of the hold information subject to special hold notice, , Subtraction time at the time of winning is set. Specifically, the winning probability of subtraction at the time of shift is such that subtraction at the time of shift is performed with a higher probability when the game result is a big hit result than when it is a losing result regardless of the number of holds after the shift Is set. In addition, the subtraction time at the time of winning is set so that the longer the subtraction time is subtracted as the number of hold after the shift is larger, regardless of the game result.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 28B, in this embodiment, the subtraction time at the time of shift is set to be different depending on the game result of the hold information that is the subject of the special hold notice. Specifically, when the number of holds after shifting is two or three, if the game result of the target hold information is a jackpot result, the subtraction time is 20 sec, and if it is a miss result, 10 sec. It is said. By doing so, a game of grasping the result of the hold information from the subtraction time at the time of shift is added, and the special hold notice can be fully enjoyed. In order to make it difficult to grasp the result of the hold information from the subtraction time at the time of shift, a configuration in which the same subtraction time can be set regardless of the game result may be adopted. Furthermore, in order to add the pleasure of predicting the result of the hold information from the subtraction time at the time of shift, for example, as a configuration in which the subtraction time is set by lottery or the like, different subtraction times are easily set depending on the game result. It may be.

  In step S2303, based on the processing result in step S2302, it is determined whether or not a lottery for subtraction upon shifting has been won. If the lottery for subtraction at the time of shift is won, a process for storing a win-at-shift flag is executed in step S2304. Thus, an affirmative determination is made in step S2301 at the next and subsequent shifts.

  In subsequent step S2305, timer subtraction processing is executed. In this process, based on the subtraction table at the time of shift, numerical information corresponding to the subtraction time corresponding to the number of holds after the shift and the game result is grasped, and the grasped numerical information is subtracted from the numerical information of the timer counter T. Execute the process. In step S 2306, the subtraction command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. This subtraction command includes information on the subtraction time to be subtracted in step S2305 and information on the timer counter T after the subtraction. The processing for outputting the subtraction command to the display control device 212 side and the subsequent processing on the display control device 212 side are as described above.

  If the shift winning flag is stored in step S2301, if it is determined in step S2303 that the subtraction lottery has not been won, or after executing the process of step S2306, the process proceeds to step S2307. In step S2307, it is determined whether or not the timer counter T has reached “0”. If the timer counter T is “0”, the elapsed flag is stored in step S2308. If the timer counter T is not “0”, the subtraction process at the time of shift is terminated.

  Next, the hold display process in step S2103 in the special hold notice control process (FIG. 34) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2401, it is determined whether an elapsed flag is stored. The case where the elapsed flag is not stored is a situation where the special condition has not yet been established. In this case, the hold display process is terminated as it is. If the elapsed flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2402. In step S2402, it is determined whether the changed flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. The changed flag is a flag stored when the holding image is changed based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied (the elapsed flag is stored) (step S2406 described later). If the changed flag is stored, the hold display process is terminated as it is. If the changed flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2403.

  In step S2403, the changed hold display is set. In this process, a holding image to be changed from the fourth holding image P4 is set based on the establishment of a special condition based on the game result of the holding information that is the target of the special holding notice. For example, the ROM 243 stores a pattern table for the holding image after the special condition is established, and a plurality of holding image patterns to be changed when the special condition is established according to the game result are set in the pattern table. Yes. Then, a counter is acquired from the RAM 244, and a holding image is determined by lottery or the like. In this embodiment, the changed hold image is uniformly set as the third hold image P3. In this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load when changing the hold image. However, in order to diversify the change pattern, it is preferable to set a plurality of hold images after the change and determine which hold image to change. In these cases, the hold image after the change may be set so as to be a hold image on the side where the big hit expectation is higher than the hold image before the change.

  Since the first hold image P1 in the present embodiment is selected only when the result is a jackpot result, when the changed hold image is set, the first hold image as the changed hold image is used. It is preferable that the image P1 for use is not selected, or the first image for reservation P1 can be selected only when the hold information that is the subject of the special hold notice is a jackpot result. In the present embodiment, the hold image before the change is uniformly set as the fourth hold image P4. However, the hold image may be randomly determined from the hold images P1 to P5 by lottery or the like. In this case, the first hold image P1 is not selected as the hold image before the change, or the first hold image P1 is displayed only when the hold information subject to the special hold notice is a big hit result. It is good to be able to choose. When the second hold image P2 is selected as the hold image before the change, the jackpot result is fixed after the change (changes to the first hold image P1). If the special condition is satisfied even though the held information is a result of losing, a contradiction between the game result and the holding image may occur. Therefore, the second holding image P2 is selected only when the time can be specified, and when the result is a jackpot result, the time is set so that a special condition can be satisfied, and the result is an outlier result. In such a case, if the time is set so that the special condition is not satisfied, inconsistency with the game result can be avoided. Note that the second holding image P2 is selected only when the second holding image P2 is not selected as the holding image before the change or when the holding information subject to the special holding notice is a jackpot result. It may be made to be able to be selected.

  In the subsequent step S2404, an effect pattern at the time of change is set. In this process, an effect pattern in the case of changing the holding image is set based on the game result of the holding information that is the target of the special holding notice. For example, the ROM 243 stores a pattern table for effect patterns at the time of change, and in this pattern table, a plurality of effect patterns are set according to game results and game conditions when special conditions are established. Then, a counter is acquired from the RAM 244, and it is determined by lottery or the like in which effect pattern the holding image is changed. As an effect pattern, for example, the pre-change hold image is once made difficult or impossible to visually recognize by displaying smoke or the like, and then the change hold image is visible, For example, there may be an effect pattern in which a plurality of hold images as candidates are displayed and the plurality of hold images are changed, and then one candidate is fixedly displayed and changed.

  In subsequent step S2405, an effect setting process is performed when special conditions are established based on the information set in steps S2403 and S2404. In this process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled so as to perform an effect corresponding to the effect pattern at the time of change and the hold image after the change. In step S 2405, the change time command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The change time command includes the information on the hold image after the change set in step S2403 and the information on the effect pattern at the change time set in step S2404, and is activated periodically. It is output to the display control device 212 by command output processing. Based on the reception of the change command, the display control device 212 grasps that the special condition is satisfied, the hold image after the change, and the effect pattern at the change. Then, image data corresponding to these effects is read from the character ROM 256, and the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the effects are displayed on the display screen G.

  In the subsequent step S2406, processing for storing the changed flag in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 is executed. By performing this process, an affirmative determination is made in step S2402 in the next and subsequent hold display processes. After executing the process of step S2406, the hold display process is terminated.

  As described above, based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied, that is, the time display image Gp of the time display area GE in the special hold notice becomes “00.00”, the hold image P differs from the previous images. It changes to an image (see FIG. 20C). More specifically, among the holding images P set in correspondence with the expected degree of jackpot, the holding image P on the side with the lower expected degree of jackpot changes from the holding image P on the higher side. Therefore, as a player, when the special hold notice starts, the time display image Gp becomes “00.00” by the end, that is, the game of the hold information that is the target after the special hold notice starts. It is expected that the period until the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends (switches to the low-speed fluctuation display) will be as long as possible. Therefore, even if the fluctuation display time of one game time becomes long, it is possible to reduce discomfort given to the player. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently perform an effect during one game, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  On the other hand, if the special condition is not satisfied, that is, the time display image Gp is “00. If it is not “00”, the holding image P does not change. Hereinafter, processing when special conditions are not satisfied will be described. This process is performed as a part of the variable display control process for controlling the effects during the game. Therefore, first, the variable display control process will be described, and then the process when the special condition is not satisfied will be described.

<Variable display control processing>
The variable display control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the variation display control process, when the variation command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received, the variation display of the symbols for one game is started on the symbol display device 41 and transmitted from the main control device 81. When the change end command is received, a process of displaying the symbol change display as the final stop display (definite stop display) is executed.

  That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38, it is determined in step S2501 whether or not one game is being executed. If one game time is not being executed, it is determined in step S2502 whether or not a change command has been received. If the change command has not been received, the change display control process is terminated as it is. If the change command has been received, the change start control process is terminated after the change start process is executed in step S2503.

  In the variation start process, information on presence / absence of reach, variation display time information, and game result information is grasped based on the command received from the main control device 81, and the grasped information is stored in the register of the MPU 242. . And based on the grasped information, the stop result of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 in the current game round is set. Specifically, when five effective lines L1 to L5 are set on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 and one of the jackpot results is obtained, the combination of the jackpot symbol is set on any of the effective lines. Set the stop result so that the stop is displayed. In addition, if the reach is displayed even if it is not a jackpot result, the combination of reach symbols is stopped on any active line, and a symbol different from the reach symbol is displayed on the effective line. Set the stop result to stop. Further, when reach display is not performed, the stop result is set so that the combination of reach symbols is not stopped and displayed on any active line. Then, the address information corresponding to the set stop result is read from the stop information table stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, and the address information is stored in the stop information address storage area of the RAM 244.

  In addition, in the variation start process, an effect pattern for the current game time is also set. In this effect pattern setting process, referring to the effect pattern table provided in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, the information on the variable display time in the current game round and the address information stored in the stop information address storage area The effect pattern corresponding to both of the above is specified and set as the effect pattern in the current game round. Then, based on the information on the stop result and the information on the effect pattern, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are started to be controlled, and a command including these pieces of information is output to the display control device 212 to display the display control device. 212 is controlled to execute display effects for game times.

  In step S2501, in the variation display control process, if one game is being executed, it is determined in step S2104 whether a variation end command has been received. If the variation end command has not been received, the variation display control processing is terminated after executing the variation processing in step S2105. If the change end command has been received, the change end control process is terminated after the change end process is executed in step S2106. In the process for ending the change, a process for ending the game number by ending the variable display in the game number and executing a notification corresponding to the game result and erasing various counters and flags set during the game number. Execute.

  The process in the case where the special condition is not satisfied in the special hold notice is performed in the above-described changing process. Therefore, the fluctuating processing will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2601, it is ascertained whether or not it is the change start timing of all symbol sequences. Incidentally, the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 are provided with an elapsed time counter for grasping the elapsed time from the start of the game times, and at the start of the game times (more specifically, at the start of the variation start process). The update of the elapsed time counter is started. The effect pattern determined in the variation start process is associated with the information of the elapsed time counter, and the MPU 242 can specify the execution timing of various effects by referring to the elapsed time counter. it can. In step S2601, it is determined from the elapsed time counter and the effect pattern in the game time being executed whether or not it is a change start timing. In the following description, in the process of determining whether or not it is the execution timing of each effect, the elapsed time counter and the effect pattern are referred to as in the process of step S2601.

  If it is the start timing of the variation of all symbol sequences, the high-speed variation start process for all symbol sequences is executed in step S2602. In this process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in response to the start of high-speed fluctuation display, and a command is output to the display control device 212, so that the high-speed fluctuation display of all symbol rows is performed on the symbol display device 41. To start. After executing the process of step S2602, the mid-variation process is terminated.

  If it is not the change start timing of all symbol sequences in step S2601, it is determined in step S2603 whether it is the deceleration timing of the upper symbol sequence Z1. If it is the deceleration timing, the deceleration processing for the upper symbol row Z1 is executed in step S2604, and then the mid-variation processing is terminated. In the deceleration process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in response to the deceleration of the upper symbol row Z1, and a command is output to the display control device 212, so that the symbol display device 41 has the upper symbol row Z1. Change the fluctuation display from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation.

  If it is not the deceleration timing of the upper symbol row Z1 in step S2603, it is determined in step S2605 whether it is the deceleration timing of the lower symbol row Z3. If it is a deceleration timing, a deceleration process for the lower symbol row Z3 is executed in step S2606. In the deceleration process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in response to the deceleration of the lower symbol row Z3, and a command is output to the display control device 212, whereby the symbol display device 41 has the lower symbol row Z3. Change the fluctuation display from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation.

  After the deceleration process of the lower symbol row Z3 is executed in step S2606, the special pending notice process is executed in step S2607, and the changing process is terminated. The special hold notice process will be described later in detail.

  If it is not the deceleration timing of the lower symbol row Z3 in step S2605, it is determined in step S2608 whether it is the deceleration timing of the middle symbol row Z2. If it is a deceleration timing, the middle symbol sequence Z2 is decelerated in step S2609, and then the changing middle processing is terminated. In the deceleration process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in response to the deceleration of the middle symbol row Z2, and a command is output to the display control device 212. Change the fluctuation display from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation.

  If it is not the deceleration timing of the middle symbol row Z2 in step S2608, it is determined in step S2610 whether it is the stop timing of the upper symbol row Z1. In the case of the stop timing, after the stop process of the upper symbol row Z1 is executed in step S2611, the changing process is ended. In the stop process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in response to the stop of the upper symbol row Z1, and a command is output to the display control device 212, so that the symbol display device 41 has the upper symbol row Z1. Stop the fluctuation display.

  If it is not the stop timing of the upper symbol row Z1 in step S2610, it is determined in step S2612 whether it is the stop timing of the lower symbol row Z3. If it is a stop timing, after the stop process for the lower symbol row Z3 is executed in step S2613, the mid-variation process is terminated. In the stop process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in response to the stop of the lower symbol row Z3, and a command is output to the display control device 212. Stop the fluctuation display.

  If it is not the stop timing of the lower symbol row Z3 in step S2612, it is determined in step S2614 whether it is the stop timing of the middle symbol row Z2. If it is the stop timing, the middle symbol sequence Z2 is stopped in step S2615, and then the mid-variation processing is terminated. In the stop process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in response to the stop of the middle symbol row Z2, and a command is output to the display control device 212. Stop the fluctuation display.

  If it is not the stop timing of the middle symbol row Z2 in step S2614, in step S2616, the processing for various effects being changed is executed, and then the changing processing is ended.

  Here, in the fluctuation display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the time from when the high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display until it stops, that is, the time during which the low-speed fluctuation display is performed is basically determined in advance. It's time. Specifically, it is a predetermined time (for example, 1 sec) except for the period during which the low-speed fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is performed in the reach display. In the low-speed fluctuation display, the player can clearly grasp the changing pattern. Therefore, the player can grasp to some extent which symbol stops on which line at the timing when the high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display. Therefore, the player can grasp whether or not the lower symbol row Z3 is a low-speed fluctuation display and a reach line is formed with the upper symbol row Z1, that is, whether or not a reach display occurs. It can be said that it is the timing when the people are highly interested. Therefore, since it is configured to determine the special condition of the special reservation notice at this timing, it is possible to avoid a situation where the player is overlooked due to his eyes being overlooked. In addition, since it is a timing that attracts attention every game in this way, this timing (timing for switching the lower symbol row Z3) is a certain level for the player even if he / she does not see the variation display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It is thought that it is possible to grasp. Therefore, it can be said that the situation where the determination of the special condition is overlooked is further suppressed.

  Next, the special hold notice process in step S2607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2701, it is determined whether a special hold notice is being executed. If it is not being executed, the special hold notice process is terminated. If the special reservation notice is being executed, it is determined in the subsequent step S2702 whether or not the current game number is a game time subject to the special reservation notice being executed. If it is not the target game time, the special hold notice process is terminated. If it is the target game time, it is determined in subsequent step S2703 whether or not an elapsed flag is stored, that is, whether or not a special condition is satisfied. When the elapsed flag is stored, the special condition is satisfied even for the game times subject to the special hold notice, and the hold image P is displayed in the hold display process (FIG. 37). Processing for changing is performed. Therefore, when the elapsed flag is stored, the special hold notice process is terminated as it is. In this case, since the holding image has already changed, the special holding notice process may be ended after the display of the time display area GE is ended.

  When the elapsed flag is not stored, that is, when the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3 is finished without special conditions being established in the game times of the hold information subject to the special hold notice, step S2704 is executed. After executing the special hold notice end process at, the special hold notice process is finished. In this end process, a subtraction end flag is stored to stop subtraction of the timer counter T. Thereby, in the timer management process (FIG. 35), the timer subtraction process (step S2203) is not performed, and the subtraction of the timer counter T is stopped.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as the end process of step S2704, the subtraction of the timer counter T is stopped, while the display of the time display image Gp in the time display area GE is continuously displayed as it is. Therefore, as the time display image Gp, an image indicating the time when the subtraction of the timer counter T stops is displayed as it is (see FIG. 20C). Therefore, the player can know that the special condition has not been met even after the subtraction is completed (after the special hold notice ends), although the predetermined set time is subtracted in the special hold notice. . In other words, even after the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3 has been completed in the game times that are subject to the special hold notice, the special hold notice had been made until then, and the special conditions were not satisfied. And the time required until the special condition is established. By doing in this way, even if the special condition is not satisfied and the holding image P is not changed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the game times while leaving the remnant.

  In other words, in the hold notice that is an effect corresponding to the hold information and is performed before the game time of the hold information, an effect that has a high expectation level as a result of the hold notice (a special hold notice in the present embodiment) If you set the, you can increase the degree of attention to the hold notice, but if the production with a high expectation level of the jackpot branches to an off-stage production, for example at the branching point during the production (this embodiment is special When the condition is not satisfied, the degree of attention to the game times of the hold information that is the target of the hold notice as well as the hold notice may be extremely reduced.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, even if it is a case where the branching to the off-site effect is branched as a branching point during the production, an index indicating how much the branch has branched to the winning side effect (in this embodiment, The remaining time of a predetermined set time is displayed. In other words, by not only branching to the hit side and off side at the branch point on production, but also displaying the degree of ease and difficulty of branching to the hit side at the branch point even after that branch, It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation even when branching to the off-side, and it is possible to suppress the degree of attention from being extremely lowered thereafter.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied after a predetermined set time has elapsed, a special hold notice is set to change the hold image P as a privilege to the player. As a result, the special display condition is satisfied after a predetermined set time has elapsed in the situation where the special hold notice is being made, that is, the variable display time of the game times executed in the situation where the special hold notice is being made. Players expect a long time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game times from being felt redundant due to a long variation display time during the game times.

  In particular, in this gaming machine, an effect is set in which the game result is predicted before the end of the game round using the type of the holding image P as the holding notice. Therefore, in the game times that are predicted to be a result of losing due to this hold notice, even if a reach display is made, the player does not expect much from it and is regarded as a mere waiting time for digestion. There is also a possibility that. Therefore, by associating the special condition in the special hold notice with the variable display time as in the above configuration, it becomes possible to contribute to the establishment of the special condition even when the time is often regarded as simply waiting for digestion. It can be avoided that the degree of attention is extremely reduced.

  In the above-described configuration, the special condition notice (the time display image Gp in the time display area GE) is displayed as a special hold notice so that the player can grasp the easiness of the special condition and the process of establishment. it can. By doing so, the relationship between the special condition and the variable display time can be clearly understood, and the effect of avoiding the disadvantage caused by the long variable display time can be suitably achieved.

  In particular, since the time display image Gp is configured to be updated with the passage of time, it is possible to clearly grasp the process of changing the possibility (establishment probability) of the special condition, and to fully understand the process of changing the possibility of establishment. Can be entertained. Since the time display image Gp is configured to be updated and displayed from the start to the end of the special hold notice, it is possible to entertain the establishment possibility at the longest.

  When the special condition is not satisfied in the special hold notice, the remaining time at the determination time of the special condition (the end point of the high-speed fluctuation display) is displayed as the time display image Gp even after the special hold notice ends. Therefore, even if the special condition is not satisfied, the player can clearly understand how long it has been satisfied. For example, when the special condition is satisfied a little later, it is simply satisfied. Since not only the result that there was no result but also a regretful level is displayed, it is possible to leave the remnant of the special reservation notice and prevent the expectation from being extremely lowered.

  In the special hold notice, the predetermined setting time is set based on the hold information digested before the hold information that is the target as well as the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice. did. By doing in this way, not only the hold information which is the object in the special hold notice, but also other hold information can be given interest, and each degree of attention can be suitably increased.

  Processing to grasp the change display time of the game times related to the hold information digested before the hold information subject to the special hold notice before the start of the game times related to the hold information digested earlier ( By providing the timer input process at the time specifying pattern), it is possible to suitably execute the special hold notice effect using the length of the variable display time.

  On the other hand, the variation display time of the game times related to the hold information digested before the hold information subject to the special hold notice changes depending on the game situation (for example, the number of holds) at the start of the game turn. obtain. In other words, a hold number correspondence pattern and a hold number non-correspondence pattern are set for the variable display time of game times, and in the case of a hold number correspondence pattern, it is difficult to grasp the change display time first. . Therefore, when the hold information digested earlier includes the hold information corresponding to the hold number correspondence pattern, the variable display time is not specified. As a result, in the production using the variable display time, it is possible to avoid as much as possible the occurrence of inconvenience in production due to the fact that the previously specified variable display time is different from the actual time.

  Here, the privilege based on the establishment of the special condition in the special reservation notice (change of the image P for reservation) is a privilege on production, and does not relate to the direct profit of the player such as a ball. That is, for example, the special condition may not be satisfied when the hold information subject to the special hold notice is a jackpot result, and the special condition is not satisfied when the hold information that is the target is an outlier result. It may be established, and vice versa, it does not affect the player's direct interests. Therefore, the success or failure of the special condition may not be determined at the start of the special hold notice, and it is not necessary to grasp all the variable display times at the start of the special hold notice as described above. Therefore, when the above-described hold information digested includes a hold number correspondence pattern, the special condition setting time is set without grasping the variable display time. In other words, regardless of the game result of the hold information that is the subject of the special hold notice, the special that was set at the start of the special hold notice depends on the game status (the acquisition status of the hold information) that is executing the special hold notice. The success or failure of the conditions will be different. By doing this, the impression that the success or failure of the special condition is determined according to the game situation is strengthened, and it is suppressed that the attention level is extremely lowered in the middle like the so-called race where the result is determined first. It becomes possible.

  In the special hold notice, the special condition is set mainly based on hold information different from the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice. By doing in this way, it becomes possible not only to hold information targeted in the special hold notice, but also to hold other hold information, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in a balanced manner Become.

  In this case, since the variable display time of the other hold information can be set after the start of the special hold notice as described above, it can be said that the probability of establishment of the special condition can also be set after the start of the special hold notice. . For this reason, in the special hold notice, not only the initial stage such as the start time but also attention can be paid at other timings.

  Furthermore, as a method of subtracting the remaining time of the predetermined set time for special conditions, in addition to the default subtraction that is a regular subtraction, as a method of changing the remaining time in the middle, subtraction at shift or specific timing subtraction is used. Provided. If only the above-mentioned default subtraction is used, at the beginning of the special hold notice or at the midway stage, depending on the player, it is determined from experience whether the special condition is easily established based on the number of hold information and the current remaining time. It can also be possible. In such a case, the degree of attention to the special reservation notice may be extremely reduced. In view of this, by including a pattern in which a group of times are subtracted at an unexpected timing, such as subtraction at the time of shift or specific timing subtraction, it becomes possible to keep interest in the special reservation notice until the end.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, among the subtraction patterns of the set time in the special reservation notice, the shift subtraction configuration is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the subtraction process at the time of shift according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the present embodiment, similarly to the processing in step S2301 in the first embodiment, it is determined in step S2801 whether or not a shift winning flag is stored. If the shift winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2802. In step S2802, a process of grasping the hold image P that is shifted to the execution display area Gb in the current shift is executed. In step S2803, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform subtraction processing during the current shift.

  In step S2803, a shift lottery table is acquired from the ROM 243, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform the subtraction process. After the processing of step S2803 is executed, the processing at step S2804 to step S2809 is executed similarly to the processing of step S2303 to step S2308 in the first embodiment, and the subtraction processing at the time of shifting is ended.

  In the lottery table at the time of shift in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, the game result of the hold information that is the subject of the special hold notice, the number of holds after the shift, and the current execution display area Gb are shifted. The holding image P defines the probability of subtraction and the subtraction time for subtraction. Specifically, when compared with the holding image P that is shifted to the execution display area Gb, the holding image P having a lower jackpot expectation level is shifted than the holding image P having a higher jackpot expectation level is shifted. However, the probability of performing subtraction is set higher regardless of the game result. This probability is set to be higher when the game result is a jackpot result than when the game result is an outlier result.

  Here, in this pachinko machine 10, the fluctuation display time of each game time is basically set according to the jackpot expectation level, and is set so that the fluctuation display time can be longer as the jackpot expectation degree becomes higher. ing. Further, as already described, the holding image P is set so that a different image is displayed according to the expected degree of jackpot. Therefore, in the game times corresponding to the holding image P on the side where the degree of expectation of jackpot is low, basically, the variable display time is shortened. In other words, if there is a game number corresponding to the holding image P on the side where the jackpot expectation is low in the situation where the special hold notice is being performed, not only can this be expected to be a jackpot result in this game number, There is a high possibility that the variation display time of the game times is short, and the rate of contribution because the special condition is satisfied is also low. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by increasing the probability that subtraction at the time of shift is performed when a game time corresponding to such a holding image P with a low jackpot expectation is executed, at least in a special holding notice, a special condition is required. Can be easily established. In this way, when a special hold notice is made, the degree of attention to the special hold notice will be drastically reduced even if the expectation of the jackpot of the hold information digested before that is low. Can be avoided.

  In the present embodiment, the probability of subtraction during shift is increased when the variable display time is short, but the subtraction time when subtraction during shift is performed may be increased. Further, the special condition may be easily established by increasing the subtraction speed of the default subtraction. Even if it does in this way, there can exist an effect similar to the above.

  Also, contrary to the above configuration, the longer the variation display time, the higher the probability that subtraction will be performed during shift, the subtraction time when subtraction during shift is performed, or the subtraction speed is increased, Special conditions may be easily established. In this case, in addition to the effect due to the long variation display time, the special condition is more easily established, which is preferable for the player.

  Further, the special condition may be made difficult to be established by reducing the probability that subtraction is performed, shortening the subtraction time when subtraction is performed, or slowing the subtraction speed. By setting such a case, even if it is predicted that the special condition will be established at the initial stage of the special hold notice, it is possible to prevent the special hold notice from being established. It is possible to keep a close eye on.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the special hold notice is executed when the change display time of the hold information can be specified. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the variable display time in the present embodiment.

  First, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the special mode is in effect. As this special mode, in the present embodiment, the special mode is set during the high frequency support mode. Specifically, the special mode flag is stored in various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. This special mode flag is stored when the high frequency support mode is set (step S903, step S906) in the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode (FIG. 15), and when the low frequency support mode is set (game number counter). Is deleted). When the special mode flag is stored or erased, a command including the information is output from the main control device 81 side to the effect control device 82 side. Thereby, it is possible for the effect control device 82 side to grasp that it is in the special mode.

  If it is determined in step S2901 that the special mode flag is not stored, in steps S2902 to S2905, the same processing as in steps S701 to S704 is executed, and the variable display time setting process is ended. To do.

  If it is determined in step S2901 that the special mode flag is stored, the variable display time table in the special mode is acquired in step S2906, and the process proceeds to step S2905. As shown in FIG. 44, the variable display time table in the special mode is set such that the hold number correspondence pattern is not set and the hold number non-correspondence pattern is selected in any case. . That is, in the special mode, the variable display time can be specified before the start of the game time of the hold information based on the information (game result, reach random number counter C3, change type counter CS) when the hold information is acquired. It is possible.

  The hold control command handling process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the processes in steps S3001 to S3003 are executed in the same manner as the processes in steps S1201 to S1203 in the first and second embodiments. In step S3004, it is determined whether the special mode is being performed. If it is in the special mode, the process proceeds to step S3005, and it is determined whether or not the hold notice counter YK is less than “3” as in the process of step S1204. If it is less than “3”, special hold notice setting processing is executed in step S3006.

  In the special hold advance notice setting process in the present embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 46, it is determined in step S3101 whether or not the hold command received this time corresponds to any jackpot result. If it is any jackpot result, the special hold notice setting process is terminated after executing the effect setting process when the time can be specified in step S3102. If it is determined in step S3101 that the result is not a jackpot result but a loss result, an effect setting process at the time of loss is executed in step S3103, and then the special hold notice setting process is terminated. The effect setting process when the time can be specified and the effect setting process when the time is off are as shown in FIGS.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the special hold notice is executed in a situation where the variable information display time of the hold information can be specified. Therefore, when the time specification cannot be performed at the start of the special hold notice (the number of holding number correspondence pattern No processing is required for the case where holding information is included), and the processing configuration can be simplified. In a configuration in which the variable display time of game times is used for a hold notice, if this variable display time can be specified in advance, a hold notice corresponding to that can be set in advance. An extreme increase in processing load can be avoided. Therefore, if the special hold notice is made in the special mode where the variable display time can be specified in advance as in the above configuration, the special hold notice effect can be set in advance in any case. preferable.

  On the other hand, if all of these effects are set in advance, there will be no room for the effects to change depending on the subsequent game situation. There is also a possibility that the degree will be extremely lowered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the special hold notice is executed when the time can be specified as described above, but when the time is used directly (timer input processing at the time specifying pattern) and so on. By setting the case where there is no (timer input processing at the time of normal pattern), it is possible to prevent the result from being grasped in advance from the contents of the production.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the hold information includes the hold information corresponding to the hold count correspondence pattern at the start of the special hold notice, a predetermined set time is set with the change display time as a temporary change display time.

  The hold control command handling process in this embodiment is substantially the same as the hold control command handling process (FIG. 19) in the first and second embodiments, and only the configuration of the special hold notice setting process is different. . The special hold advance notice setting process in the present embodiment is the same process as the special hold advance notice setting process (FIG. 46) in the third embodiment.

  Here, even when the time specifying pattern is selected as the effect pattern for the special hold notice in the effect setting process when the time can be specified (FIG. 24), unlike the third embodiment, the change in the hold information The case where the display time cannot be specified in advance (when the pattern is a pending number correspondence pattern) is included. Therefore, in the present embodiment, with respect to the hold information of the hold number correspondence pattern, the effect is set by specifying the change display time as the temporary change display time.

  That is, in the variable display time table in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 47, reach non-occurrence B and normal reach B are included as the hold number correspondence pattern, and a temporary variable display time corresponding to these is set. ing. In this case, the temporary variation display time is set to the time that can be actually set or less, more specifically, the shortest time that can be actually set. For this reason, even if such provisional variable display time is incorporated into the predetermined set time in the special hold notice, the success or failure of the final special condition is not affected. In other words, the hold information corresponding to the hold count correspondence pattern has the shortest temporary change display time regardless of whether the actual change display time is set to the longest time or the shortest time is set. Since time is set, the success or failure of special conditions is not affected. By doing in this way, it is a configuration in which the difference in the variable display time can occur due to the difference between the grasp timing of the variable display time for setting the effect of the hold notice and the actual variable display time setting timing. However, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenience in the production setting.

  In this embodiment, the temporary variation display time is set to be equal to or less than the time that can be actually set, but after being set to be equal to or longer than the time that can be actually set, the pending control command response processing May be changed as follows.

  That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 48, the processing of step S3201 to step S3208 is executed similarly to the processing of step S1201 to step S1208. If it is determined in step S3201 that a hold command has not been received, it is determined in step S3209 whether a shift command has been received. If it has been received, in step S3210, a secondary hold storage is performed. Subtraction processing of the number SN is performed. In step S3211, it is determined whether the hold information shifted to the current execution area AE is the hold information corresponding to the hold number correspondence pattern as the adjustment process at the time of shifting. If it is not the reserved number correspondence pattern, it is determined in step S3212 whether or not a shift subtraction flag is stored. If it is stored, a shift subtraction process is executed in step S3213. If it is the pending number correspondence pattern in step S3211, the shift time subtraction process is executed in step S3213 regardless of the presence or absence of the shift time subtraction flag. After the execution of the process of step S3213, the shift process is executed in the same manner as the process of step S1213 in step S3214, and then the hold control command response process is terminated.

  In the subtraction process at the time of shift in step S3213, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 49, it is determined in step S3301 whether or not the pattern corresponds to the number of holdings as in step S3211. When the pattern is not the hold count correspondence pattern, the processing of step S3302 to step S3309 is executed in the same manner as the processing of step S2301 to step S2308. If it is determined in step S3301 that the pattern is a hold number correspondence pattern, the process advances to step S3310 to determine whether a special hold notice is being executed.

  If the special hold notice is being executed, the process proceeds to step S3311, and it is determined whether or not the variable display time is shortened from the temporarily set variable display time as described above in the special hold notice. The fluctuation display time can be grasped by referring to the value of the secondary reserved storage number SN, and it can be determined whether or not the fluctuation display time has been shortened from the temporarily set fluctuation display time. . Note that when a shift command is output from the main control device 81, a variation command is also output. Therefore, the actual variation display time may be determined based on the variation command.

  If it is determined in step S3311 that the time has been shortened, in step S3312, a process of subtracting numerical information corresponding to the shortened time from the timer counter T is executed as a timer subtraction process. In step S3313, the subtraction time command including the subtraction time and the information of the timer counter T after the subtraction is output to the display control device 212, and then the process proceeds to step S3308. If a negative determination is made in step S3310 or step S3311, the subtraction process at the time of shift is terminated.

  As described above, even when the effect is set as the temporary variable display time when the special hold notice is set, the inconvenience in effect occurs by performing subtraction at the time of the shift as a post-adjustment means. You can avoid that.

  Since this adjustment means is a subtraction during shift that can occur even during normal times, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player during adjustment, and it is also necessary to provide a new process as the adjustment means. It is also possible to suppress the complexity of the processing configuration.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the subtraction method of the timer counter T is different from that of the above embodiment. Hereinafter, different configurations will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart for explaining timer management processing in the present embodiment.

  In the timer management process in the present embodiment, the processes in steps S3401 to S3415 are executed in the same manner as the processes in steps S2201 to S2215 in the above embodiments. If it is determined in step S3413 that neither the tail specific change flag and the one-shot reverse flag are stored, or if it is determined in step S3414 that the timing is not the specific change timing and the one-shot reverse effect, After performing the subtraction value adjustment process in step S3416, the timer management process is terminated.

  Here, in the subtraction process of default subtraction (step S3404) in the present embodiment, a subtraction value (subtraction width) can be set in one process. In step S3404, a process of subtracting the set subtraction value from the timer counter T is performed. In the subtraction value adjustment process in step S3416, this subtraction value is set. Note that the normal subtraction value is “1” as in the above embodiments.

  The subtraction value adjustment processing in step S3416 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the currently executed game number is the game number of the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice. If a negative determination is made in step S3501, the subtraction value adjustment process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative decision is made in step S3501 and the game time is the hold information subject to special hold notice, the process proceeds to step S3502, and whether or not the adjusted flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. Determine whether. The adjusted flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to specify that the subtraction value has already been adjusted in the game time. If the adjusted flag is stored, the subtraction value adjustment process is terminated as it is.

  If the adjusted flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3503. In step S3503, processing for grasping the remaining time (set remaining time) of a predetermined set time is executed. Specifically, the current value of the timer counter T is grasped. In the subsequent step S3504, processing for grasping the remaining time (actual remaining time) until the end of the high-speed fluctuation display in the current game round is executed. Specifically, referring to the address information of the effect pattern for game times, the time required until the end of the high-speed fluctuation display is grasped. In step S3505, the set remaining time grasped in step S3503 is compared with the actual remaining time grasped in step S3504, and the value (S1) obtained by subtracting the actual remaining time from the set remaining time is 0. Whether the set remaining time is longer than the actual remaining time.

  The case where S1 is larger than 0 in step S3505 is a case where the set remaining time is longer than the actual remaining time and the specific condition is not satisfied even if the default subtraction is performed as it is. In that case, it progresses to step S3506 and a subtraction value increase lottery process is performed. In this process, a lottery table is acquired from the ROM 243, and a lottery counter is acquired from the RAM 244 to increase the subtraction value (usually “1”) of the timer counter T in one processing round in the default subtraction. A lottery of whether or not is executed.

  In this embodiment, the winning probability is set to be different depending on the game result of the hold information that has been triggered by the special hold notice. Specifically, the winning probability is 30%, and the result is a missed result. In this case, it is set to win the subtraction value increase lottery with a probability of 10%. The winning probability may be set differently depending on the length of S1. For example, if the winning probability is higher as S1 is longer, the unexpectedness when the specific condition is satisfied can be enhanced. Conversely, if the winning probability is higher as S1 is shorter, the situation in which the specific condition is satisfied can be relieved (the specific condition is satisfied by increasing the subtraction value).

  After the subtraction value increase lottery process is executed in step S3506, it is determined in step S3507 whether or not the subtraction value increase lottery is won based on the processing result of step S3506. If not, the subtraction value adjustment process is terminated. If it is elected, the process proceeds to step S3508. In step S3508, it is determined whether the value (S2) obtained by further subtracting the actual remaining time from S1 is greater than 0, that is, whether the set remaining time is longer than twice the actual remaining time. When S2 is larger than 0 in step S3508, in step S3509, the value (S3) obtained by further subtracting the actual remaining time from S2 becomes larger than 0, that is, the set remaining time is 3 of the actual remaining time. It is determined whether it is longer than twice. If S3 is smaller than 0 in step S3509, that is, if the set remaining time is 2 to 3 times the actual remaining time, the process proceeds to step S3510, and the subtraction value for subtraction is set to “3”. Execute the process. By performing this process, in the subsequent step S3404, a process of subtracting "3" from the timer counter T is performed. That is, the subtraction speed for the predetermined set time is changed to a speed that is three times higher than that.

  If S2 is 0 or less in step S3508, that is, if the set remaining time is 1 to 2 times the actual remaining time, the process proceeds to step S3511, and the subtraction value for subtraction is set to “2”. Execute the process. By performing this process, in the subsequent step S3404, a process of subtracting "2" from the timer counter T is performed. That is, the subtraction speed for the predetermined set time is changed to a speed twice that of the previous speed.

  After performing the process of step S3510 or step S3511, it progresses to step S3512, and after performing a timer effect change process, a subtraction value adjustment process is complete | finished. In this timer effect changing process, a command including information on the subtraction value changed in step S3510 or step S3511 is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command controls the symbol display device 41 so that the notification mode of the set time by the time display image Gp in the time display region GE becomes a notification mode different from the previous notification mode.

  Specifically, as the different notification modes, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), a start and a goal are displayed, and a preset character moves with a vehicle from the start toward the goal. Do. If the character reaches the goal by the time the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends, the special condition is satisfied and the holding image P changes to a different image. If the character does not reach the goal, the special condition is satisfied. It shall not be established. If the subtraction value is set to “3” in step S3510, the vehicle is set as a rocket (FIG. 52 (a1)), and the subtraction value is set to “2” in step S3511. In this case, the vehicle is set as a motorcycle (FIG. 52 (a2)). In other words, depending on the type (speed) of the vehicle, it is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation to reach the goal (expected expectation of establishment of special conditions).

  By doing this, even if the set remaining time is clearly longer than the actual remaining time, by leaving the possibility that the special condition can be satisfied, the special condition is quickly given up. It is possible to suppress a reduction in the degree of attention. In this case, the success or failure of the special condition that the character from the start to the goal moves is notified by the display of the relative distance from the mode in which the success or failure of the special condition is notified by the absolute time display as in the time display image Gp. Therefore, even if the speed at which the set time is advanced is changed, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player feels uncomfortable.

  If S3 is larger than 0 in step S3509, that is, if the set remaining time is longer than three times the actual remaining time, the subtraction value adjustment process is terminated as it is. That is, in this case, the subtraction value is not adjusted. This is because if the special condition is satisfied by adjusting the subtraction value even if the set remaining time and actual remaining time are too far apart, in the first place, the degree of attention to this special pending notice may decrease. This is a device for avoiding a reduction in the degree of attention.

  If it is determined in step S3505 that S1 is not greater than 0, that is, if the actual remaining time is longer than the set remaining time, the process proceeds to step S3513. The case where the process proceeds to step S3513 is a case where a special condition is satisfied. In step S3513, it is determined whether or not the absolute value of S1 is equal to or greater than a predetermined set value (for example, a value corresponding to 2 sec). If the absolute value of S1 is less than the set value, the subtraction value adjustment process is terminated as it is.

  If the absolute value of S1 is greater than or equal to the set value, that is, if the actual remaining time is longer than the set remaining time and the difference is greater than or equal to the set value (2 sec), the process proceeds to step S3514. In step S3514, a subtraction value reduction lottery process is executed. In this process, a lottery table is acquired from the ROM 243, and a lottery counter is acquired from the RAM 244, and the subtraction value (usually “1”) of the timer counter T in one process is reduced in the default subtraction. A lottery of whether or not is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the winning probability is set so as to differ depending on the game result of the hold information that has been triggered by the special hold notice. Specifically, if the winning result is a jackpot result, the winning result is 10%. In this case, it is set to win the subtraction value reduction lottery with a probability of 30%. The winning probability may be set differently depending on the length of S1. For example, the longer the S1 is, the higher the winning probability is, so that it is possible to prevent the specific condition from being established earlier, and conversely, the shorter the S1 is, the higher the winning probability is. By doing so, it is possible to create a situation in which the last specific condition is satisfied by shortening the difference between the set remaining time and the actual remaining time.

  After the subtraction value reduction lottery process is executed in step S3514, it is determined in step S3515 whether or not the subtraction value reduction lottery is won based on the processing result of step S3514. If not, the subtraction value adjustment process is terminated. If it is elected, the process proceeds to step S3516. In step S3516, it is determined whether the value (S4) obtained by subtracting the set remaining time from the absolute value of S1 is greater than 0, that is, whether the actual remaining time is longer than twice the set remaining time. If S4 is larger than 0 in step S3516, that is, if the actual remaining time is longer than twice the set remaining time, a process of setting the subtraction value for subtraction to “0.5” in step S3517. Execute. By performing this process, in the subsequent step S3404, a process of subtracting "0.5" from the timer counter T is performed. That is, the subtraction speed for the predetermined set time is changed to a speed that is 0.5 times the previous speed.

  If S4 is 0 or less in step S3516, that is, if the actual remaining time is 1 to 2 times the set remaining time, the process proceeds to step S3518, and the subtraction value for subtraction is set to “0.8”. Execute the setting process. By performing this process, in the subsequent step S3404, a process of subtracting “0.8” from the timer counter T is performed. That is, the subtraction speed for the predetermined set time is changed to a speed that is 0.8 times the previous speed.

  After performing the process of step S3517 or step S3518, it progresses to step S3519, and after performing a timer effect change process, a subtraction place adjustment process is complete | finished. In this timer effect change process, a command including information on the subtraction value changed in step S3517 or step S3518 is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command controls the symbol display device 41 so that the notification mode of the set time by the time display image Gp in the time display region GE becomes a notification mode different from the previous notification mode.

  As the different notification modes, specifically, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), a start and a goal are displayed, and an effect that a preset character moves on the vehicle from the start toward the goal is performed. If the character reaches the goal by the time the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends, the special condition is satisfied and the holding image P changes to a different image. If the character does not reach the goal, the special condition is satisfied. It shall not be established. If the subtraction value is set to “0.5” in step S3517, the vehicle is set as a rocket. If the subtraction value is set to “0.8” in step S3518, the vehicle is set. Set the bike. That is, the same effect as when the subtraction value is increased is performed. However, if the subtraction value is set to “0.5” in step S3517, for example, a meteorite group appears between the start and the goal, and the speed of the rocket cannot be moved during that time. A slowing effect is performed (FIG. 52 (b1)). In addition, when the subtraction value is set to “0.8” in step S3518, for example, a gas station appears near the goal and refuels there, and the motorcycle stops immediately before the goal. Is produced (FIG. 52 (b2)).

  In this way, even if the set remaining time is clearly shorter than the actual remaining time, leaving the possibility that the special condition will not be satisfied, the special hold notice will be issued on the way as the special condition will be satisfied. It is possible to suppress the loss of attention to whereabouts. In this case, the success or failure of the special condition that the character from the start to the goal moves is notified by the display of the relative distance from the mode in which the success or failure of the special condition is notified by the absolute time display as in the time display image Gp. Therefore, even if the speed at which the set time is advanced is changed, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player feels uncomfortable. In addition, by associating with the effect when the subtraction value is increased, it becomes possible to pay attention to which adjustment is made among the increase and decrease of the subtraction value.

  Note that the execution timing of the process for reducing the subtraction value (steps S3514 to S3521) may be set to be earlier than the above. That is, as the timing earlier than the start timing of the game time of the hold information subject to the special hold notice, the hold information digested one time before the target hold information or the previous two times The processing for reducing the subtraction value may be performed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start) in the game times of the hold information. By doing in this way, it is possible to prolong the special condition that can be established quickly to the game number of the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the said 1st-5th embodiment, it was set as the structure which performs the effect which changes the image P for holding | maintenance into the image for holding | maintenance with a high jackpot expectation as a privilege based on the special conditions being satisfied in the special reservation notice. However, in this embodiment, the privilege to be granted is changed based on the fact that this special condition is satisfied.

  In the present embodiment, the character PM is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, lower right) in the display screen G separately from the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that perform variable display (see FIG. 53A). The character PM is involved in the performance of the game times and, for example, assists the same symbol as the reach symbol forming the reach line in the reach display to stop at the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2 (for example, the change destination side). To try to stop the fluctuation by pressing the design from).

  When the special condition is established in the special reservation notice of the present embodiment, the item A equipped with the character PM is displayed as a privilege given to the player (see FIG. 53B). It is displayed with the equipped. When the character PM equips this item A, the aspect that assists the reach symbol to stop on the reach line is different from the case where the character PM is not equipped (specifically, it becomes flashy). Done. Therefore, by equipping the character PM with this item A, the player can obtain a satisfaction that he / she customizes the reach display effect and can be more immersed in the game. Note that if the special condition is not satisfied in the special hold notice, the item A is not displayed.

  In the present embodiment, an operation unit 75 that can be operated by the player is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine main body 12 (see FIG. 1), and by operating this operation unit 75, the state of the character PM is changed to the player. Output information that can be read by a portable terminal or the like included in is output. Further, by reading this output information with a portable terminal or the like, the information is stored in the portable terminal or the management server. Then, by inputting the stored information to the pachinko machine 10 via the operation unit 75, the character PM is displayed in a state corresponding to the stored information. Therefore, for example, from the start of the game, it is possible to display the character PM equipped with the item A with special conditions established, and even if the game machines are different, they can be displayed on the mobile terminal or the management server. The stored information can be used.

  The operation unit 75 is connected to the effect control device 82, and operation information of the operation unit is output to the effect control device 82. The operation unit 75 includes a rotation operation unit that can perform a rotation operation, for example. The operation unit 75 is in an output state in which information on the character PM is output depending on the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit, or in an input state in which information on the character PM is input. It can be selected. The operation unit 75 is provided with, for example, a ten o'clock key as an input unit for inputting information on the character PM. In the input state, a screen keyboard or the like is displayed on the display screen G, and it is possible to input character PM information (for example, an 8-digit password) by operating the cross key to move the cursor. ing. The configuration of the operation unit 75 is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

  Hereinafter, the process for operation performed by MPU242 of the production | presentation control apparatus 82 is demonstrated, referring the flowchart of FIG. The operation process is a part of the corresponding process for responding to the operation of the operation unit 75 activated in the MPU 242 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec cycle). In the corresponding process, the output state or the input state is set. Is launched for. In this handling process, in addition to the operation process, for example, an effect process based on the operation of the operation unit 75 (for example, a process for performing an effect such as an action by the character PM or an attack by the item A), a special hold, etc. Processing for responding to the operation of the operation unit 75 in effects and settings other than the advance notice is performed.

  First, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the operation unit 75 has been operated. In step S3601, once an operation is detected, an affirmative determination is made until processing based on the operation is completed. If an operation has been performed, the process advances to step S3602 to determine whether an operation for setting the output state has been performed (the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit corresponds to the direction for setting the output state). Determine. If it is an operation for setting the output state, the process advances to step S3603 to store the output state flag in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 and set the output state. In step S3603, information for output is grasped. That is, a process of grasping information on the item A that the character PM has is executed. In step S3604, an information output command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The information output command includes information indicating that the output state is set and information on the item A included in the character PM. The display control device 212 that has received the information output command receives the character from the character ROM 256. The code image CG (for example, QR code (registered trademark)) corresponding to the information of the item A included in the PM is read, and the symbol display device 41 is controlled to display the code image CG on the display screen G (FIG. 53 ( c)).

  If it is determined in step S3602 that the operation is not an operation for setting the output state, the process advances to step S3605 to perform an operation for setting the input state (the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit is set to the input state). It corresponds to the direction to be performed). If it is an operation for setting to the input state, the process proceeds to step S3606, where the input state flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 and set to the input state. In step S3607, an information input command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The information input command includes information indicating that the input state has been set, and the display control device 212 that has received the information input command receives an input state image (for example, code input) from the character ROM 256. The image display device 41 is controlled to display an image for the input state on the display screen G (see FIG. 53D).

  If it is determined in step S3601 that the operation is not performed, if it is determined in step S3605 that the operation is not an operation for setting the input state, or after the process of step S3604 or step S3607 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3608. . In step S3608, processing for determining whether or not the output state is in effect is performed by checking the output state flag. If it is in the output state, the process advances to step S3609 to determine whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 10 sec) has elapsed since the output state was set. When the output / input state is set in step S3603 or step S3606, updating of the timer counter that can grasp the passage of time is started. In step S3609, based on the fact that the value of the timer counter is numerical information corresponding to the predetermined time, it can be specified that the predetermined time has elapsed. If the predetermined time has not elapsed, the operation process is terminated as it is.

  If the predetermined time has elapsed, the process advances to step S3610 to execute state recovery processing. In this process, the output state flag is deleted in order to return from the output state to the normal state. In step S3611, the state return command is set as an output target to the display control device 212, and then the operation process is terminated. This state return command includes information indicating that the output state has returned to the normal state, and the display control device 212 that has received the state return command receives an image (character PM) corresponding to the normal state from the character ROM 256. The symbol display device 41 is controlled to display the image on the display screen G.

  If it is determined in step S3608 that the output state is not set, the process advances to step S3612 to check whether or not the input state is set by checking the input state flag. If it is in the input state, the process advances to step S3613 to determine whether a predetermined time (for example, 20 sec) has elapsed since the input state was set, or whether an input operation has been performed. Determine whether. The timer counter is used for determining whether the predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, the input state and the output state are set to have a longer predetermined time in the input state. This is because when the time required for code input is compared with the time required for code reading, code input requires a larger amount of operation and is considered to require a long time. Whether or not an input operation has been performed can be determined by grasping a signal from the cross key in the operation unit 75. When the code input is a code with a plurality of digits, for example, when the operation unit 75 requires a plurality of operations, the predetermined time is extended for each operation. It is good to do. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the input state is released before the operation is completed when the operation is started near the lapse of the predetermined time.

  If it is determined in step S3613 that a predetermined time has elapsed or an input operation has been performed, a state recovery process is executed in step S3614. In this process, the input state flag is deleted in order to return from the input state to the normal state. In step S3615, the state return command is set as an output target to the display control device 212, and then the operation process ends. This command for returning the state includes information on the item A corresponding to the input code in addition to the information indicating that the state has returned from the input state to the normal state, and the display control device that has received the state return command 212 reads an image (such as an image of the character PM) corresponding to the normal state and the image of the item A from the character ROM 256 and controls the symbol display device 41 to display the image on the display screen G. This makes it possible for the character PM to play a game with the item A (see FIG. 53 (e)).

  As described above, if the special condition is established in the special reservation notice as in the present embodiment, if the player is given a certain benefit, the player is satisfied that the specific condition is satisfied, that is, the special reservation notice is issued. In order to expect a long display time of the game times to be executed during the period in which the game is being performed, even if the variable display time of the game times is long, it does not simply become redundant, and attention to the game It is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree.

  In addition, if a plurality of items A are set and which item A is given as a privilege by lottery or the like each time a specific condition is established, the pleasure of collecting the items A is also added, and the fun of the game is improved. More preferable from the viewpoint. In this case, as shown to Fig.55 (a), you may set so that the kind of item A provided may differ according to the difficulty (length of predetermined setting time) of specific conditions. By doing in this way, the rarity when a more difficult special condition is materialized can be raised and the pleasure which collects the item A can be increased.

  In addition, the type of item A to be given may be varied depending on the game times effect during execution of the special reservation notice. For example, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), it may be configured to vary according to the number of stops of a specific symbol (for example, a main symbol with 7) in the game times during execution of the special hold notice. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to raise the degree of attention to the special reservation notice and the game times being executed.

  Furthermore, in the said embodiment, it was set as the structure from which the aspect of reach display differs because the character PM equips the item A, However, It is good also as a structure from which the establishment probability of special conditions changes. That is, for example, in a process that is activated at a predetermined cycle (2 msec cycle) by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 as in the operation-corresponding subtraction process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 56, the special condition is adjusted based on the operation. Also good.

  Specifically, it is determined in step S3701 whether or not a special hold notice is being executed. If it is being executed, it is determined whether or not the operation unit 75 has been operated in step S3702. . If an operation has been performed, it is determined in step S2703 whether or not item A is displayed. If a negative determination is made in any of steps S3701 to S3703, the operation corresponding subtraction process is terminated as it is.

  If item A is displayed in step S3703, the process advances to step S3704 to execute processing for selecting the type of item A. In this process, for example, a selection screen for displaying the type of item A selected this time from a plurality of items A is displayed (see FIG. 55B). In this selection screen, the item A (including information input from the mobile terminal) assigned so far and the subtraction value information corresponding to the type of the item A are displayed. The subtraction value information is information on time to be subtracted from a predetermined set time among information set according to the type of item A, as shown in FIG. 55 (a). Note that the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 during the variable display are reduced and displayed in an area that does not overlap the selection screen, for example. Then, the type of item A is selected based on the operation signal from the operation unit 75.

  In a succeeding step S3705, processing for grasping the subtraction value information of the selected item A is executed. In step S3706, the timer counter T is subtracted based on the subtraction value information grasped in step S3705. In step S3708, the subtraction command is displayed on the display controller 212, and the operation-corresponding subtraction process is terminated. The processing on the display control device 212 side that has received the subtraction command is as described above.

  In this way, by making it possible to reflect the item A as the granted privilege in the special conditions, not only the enjoyment of collecting the item A but also the enjoyment of using the item A is added. And, by using the item A, it is possible to make it easier to obtain the item A (reflected in special conditions). In other words, the success or failure of the special conditions can be used to make a game with chained fun, and it is possible to encourage more active participation in the game and be more immersed in the game.

  In this case, the information of item A may be configured to be deleted when used during the special reservation notice. By doing in this way, the willingness to collect further item A can be stimulated.

  Further, if the item A is not used in the current special reservation notice, the item A may be configured to hold its use until the next special reservation notice is executed. By doing in this way, for example, according to the special conditions in the special reservation notice, it is possible to consider whether or not to use the item A, and to devise the type of the item A to be used. Encourage participation.

  Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which can hold | maintain the execution right of a special reservation notice. Specifically, for example, in the special reservation notice setting process, when the special reservation notice execution lottery is won, the right to execute the special reservation notice is obtained. When the execution right is obtained, a right image indicating that the right is being held is displayed on the display screen G, for example. Then, the execution right can be exercised at a timing intended by the player, and specifically, a special suspension notice can be executed based on the operation of the operation unit 75. In this way, a game situation in which special conditions are likely to be established in the special hold notice (for example, when there are a plurality of hold information or when the variable display time is expected to be long depending on the type of the hold image P, etc. ), Or when the player wants to obtain special benefits such as changes in the image P for hold or items A (type of hold information), the player will be able to leave the special hold notice to the player's will, and more actively participate in the game. Can be encouraged.

  The opportunity for obtaining the right to execute the special hold notice is not limited to the lottery at the time of receiving the hold command. For example, it may be a case where the number of games reaches a predetermined number (for example, 500 times) An effect (for example, a premier effect) may be executed, or the number of executions of the predetermined effect may reach a predetermined number. In these cases, in the configuration for interlocking with the portable terminal or the like, the total number of times may be set. In this way, the right to execute a special reservation notice is obtained in various situations, and the game can be diversified.

  In addition, the special conditions of the special hold notice that is on hold may be set by a lottery, etc. at the time of acquisition of the rights, or depending on the game situation at the time of exercising the rights (at the start of the special hold notice) It is good also as a structure set like each embodiment. In the case of a configuration that is set at the time of acquiring the right, it is preferable that the player can grasp the special condition (predetermined set time) (for example, a configuration that displays the special condition in accordance with the right image). By doing so, it becomes possible to devise the timing of exercising rights. However, even if it is difficult or impossible to grasp the special conditions, it is possible to expect the effect of increasing the unexpectedness at the time of exercising the rights.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In this embodiment, it is configured that the winning to the upper working port 33 and the winning to the lower working port 34 are distinguished from each other, and whether or not the holding information is based on winning to either one (for example, winning to the lower working port 34). The lottery is configured to be executed in preference to the determination of whether or not to hold the hold information based on the winning of the other.

  The configuration of the reserved ball storage area 232 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  The reserved ball storage area 232 in the present embodiment includes a first result display area reservation area Ra provided as first acquisition information storage means and a second result display area reservation area provided as second acquisition information storage means. Rb. The holding area Ra for the first result display unit displays the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the upper working port 33. This is a reserved area for storing in series. Note that the combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS stored in the first result display holding area Ra is the holding information related to the upper operating port 33. The hold information corresponds to special information in the present embodiment.

  In addition, the second result display section reservation area Rb displays the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the lower operating port 34. This is a reserved area for time series storage. Note that the combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS stored in the second result display area holding area Rb is the holding information related to the lower operating port 34. The hold information corresponds to special information in the present embodiment.

  Each of the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb includes four storage areas of a first area to a fourth area, and a reservation number storage area. Each storage area has a C1 storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a C2 storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and a C3 storage for storing the value of the reach random number counter C3. An area and a CS storage area for storing the value of the variation type counter CS are configured. With the four storage areas from the first area to the fourth area, a maximum of four game balls winning histories to the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 are held and stored.

  Then, in the winning process for the operating opening in the present embodiment (FIG. 7), when the winning to the upper operating opening 33 occurs, the reserved storage number RaN of the first result display area reservation area Ra is less than 4. Under certain conditions, the buffer values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS are stored in the corresponding storage areas. In addition, when a winning to the lower working port 34 occurs, the big hit random number counter C1 is stored in the corresponding storage area on the condition that the reserved storage number RbN of the second result display portion reservation area Rb is less than 4. The buffer values of the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS are stored.

  Further, although detailed description with reference to the drawings is omitted, in this embodiment, the main reserved light emitting unit 45 includes a light emitting unit for the upper working port 33 (first holding light emitting unit) and a light emitting unit for the lower working port 34 (first 2 on-hold light emission unit). The hold display area Ga on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 also includes a hold display area for the upper working port 33 (first hold display area) and a hold display area for the lower working port 34 (second hold display area). , Are set separately. Each holding light emitting unit is provided in four in correspondence with the maximum storage number of each holding storage number RaN, RbN, and each holding display area is also divided into four in correspondence with the maximum storage number.

  Each of the hold commands set in the winning process for the operating port includes information indicating which of the operating ports 33 and 34 is a hold command based on winning. Further, the storage area for holding 250 on the side of the effect control device 82 also includes a first storage area to a fourth storage area corresponding to the upper operation opening 33, and a first storage area to a fourth storage area corresponding to the lower operation opening 34. In the hold display control command handling process (FIG. 19), information related to hold information is stored in the corresponding storage area based on the receipt of each hold command. And the production | presentation control apparatus 82 which received the said hold command controls the corresponding hold light emission part corresponding to the increase in the number of hold memory. In the hold display area 271 of the display control device 212, the first unit area to the fourth unit area corresponding to the upper operation port 33 and the first unit area to the fourth unit area corresponding to the lower operation port 34 are set. ing. The effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 to execute a process for displaying the hold image in the corresponding hold display area.

  Next, data setting processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, the data setting process is a process executed at the start of each game time in the game time control process (FIG. 11).

  In the data setting process in the present embodiment, first, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is “0”. When the second start reserved memory number RbN is “0”, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S3802 to S3807 is executed, and when the second start reserved memory number RbN is not “0”. Executes the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S3808 to S3813.

  Here, the case where the data setting process is executed means that the first start reserved memory number RaN of the first result display portion reservation area Ra and the second start reservation storage number RbN of the second result display portion reservation area Rb. This is a case where the common hold number CRN which is the total number is 1 or more. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start pending storage number RbN is “0”. If it is not “0”, is the first start pending storage number RaN 1 or more? Regardless of whether or not, the data stored in the second result display area Rb is set for variable display. Thereby, when the hold information is stored in both the first result display portion reservation area Ra and the second result display portion reservation area Rb, the second result display portion reservation corresponding to the lower operation port 34 is performed. The hold information stored in the area Rb is prioritized.

  In the data setting process for the first result display section, first, in step S3802, the number of reserved storages RaN in the first result display section reservation area Ra is decremented by one. In subsequent step S3803, 1 is subtracted from the common holding number CRN. Thereafter, in step S3804, the data stored in the first area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

  After that, in step S3805, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area to the fourth area to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area, and the second area → the first area, The data in each area is shifted such as the third area → second area and the fourth area → third area.

  In a succeeding step S3806, a shift command is set. In this case, from the command information storage area 223 of the ROM 203, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is shifted this time corresponds to the reserved area Ra for the first result display section, that is, the upper operating port 33. A shift command including information indicating that it corresponds is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S3807 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 8). In the effect control device 82, based on the received command at the time of shift, a process for changing the display on the first hold light emitting unit in accordance with the decrease in the hold number is executed. Furthermore, the effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 to execute processing for changing the hold image in the corresponding hold display area.

  In the data setting process for the second result display unit, first, in step S3807, 1 is subtracted from the second start reserved memory number RbN of the second result display unit reserved area Rb. In subsequent step S3808, 1 is subtracted from the common holding number CRN. Thereafter, in step S2509, the data stored in the first area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

  Thereafter, in step S3810, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area to the fourth area to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area, and the second area → the first area, The data in each area is shifted such as the third area → second area and the fourth area → third area.

  In the subsequent step S3811, a shift command is set. In this case, from the command information storage area 223 of the ROM 203, it corresponds to the information indicating that the reserved area to which the current data shift corresponds corresponds to the reserved area Rb for the second result display section, that is, corresponds to the lower operation port 34. The command at the time of shift including the information indicating that the command is being performed is selected, and the selected command at the time of shift is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S3811 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 8). In the effect control device 82, based on the received command at the time of shift, a process for changing the display on the second hold lamp unit corresponding to the decrease in the number of hold is executed. Furthermore, the effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 to execute processing for changing the hold image in the corresponding hold display area.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even when the hold information based on the winning at the upper working port 33 is stored, the winning at the lower working port 34 is performed at a timing before the held information becomes a target of the determination of whether or not the winning is made. When this occurs, the hold information based on the winning to the lower working port 34 is the target of the determination of success / failure first. For example, when a special reservation notice is executed for the hold information based on the winning to the upper working port 33, when a winning to the lower working port 34 occurs, the time required for elapse of a predetermined set time increases. . That is, the probability of establishment of the special condition changes (becomes higher). In this way, the special hold notice is started by adopting a configuration in which the probability of establishment of the special condition can be changed based on the entry to the predetermined entry part (the lower operation port 34) that is executing the special hold notice. In this case, it is possible not only to watch the game, but also to continue the launch of the game ball actively to enter the specified entry area even during the special hold notice. It becomes.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, not only the hold information subject to the special hold notice but also the information on the variable display time of other hold information contributes to the establishment of the special condition in the special hold notice. In the embodiment, this is changed so that the effect during the game turn in the other hold information contributes to the establishment of the special condition in the special hold notice.

  That is, the stop result of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 during the game round contributes to the success or failure of the special condition in the special reservation notice. Specifically, a special condition is established when a special reservation notice is presented, such as a bingo game, in which a predetermined symbol combination is presented and all or part of the presented symbol combination is stopped in a game round To do. In this way, when a special reservation notice occurs, it is possible to draw attention to the stop symbol of each game time.

  Like the pachinko machine 10, the holding information that is the basis of the lottery is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry part (upper operation port 33 or lower operation port 34), and the hold information Can be stored up to a predetermined number, in addition to the game round effect corresponding to the lottery for each hold information, in addition to a hold notice for the hold information before the lottery (not only a special hold notice but also a hold image) If a production with a high expectation level for jackpots is generated in this hold notice, the degree of attention to the hold information corresponding to the production will increase, but other types of hold will be held. There is a possibility that the degree of attention to information about the game times will be reduced. Therefore, as described above, if a hold notice with a high expectation level for jackpots is generated, the special hold notice effect that is triggered by the hold notice will be associated with the stop symbol of the running game, By increasing the degree of attention to the special reservation notice, it is possible to increase the degree of attention not only to the reservation information that is the subject of the reservation notice but also to the game times effect for other reservation information.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration for associating success / failure of the special condition with the stop symbol of each game time in the special hold notice is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold notice (change of the image for hold) is used as a start opportunity. It is configured that a predetermined effect (special hold notice) is performed in the game times for the hold information other than the hold information that is the subject of the hold notice, and the success or failure of the special condition set in the given effect is determined as the hold What is necessary is just to set it as the structure determined based on hold information other than the hold information used as the object of notice.

  The success or failure of the special condition is related to the game result of the hold information as in the second embodiment, in addition to the stop pattern of each game time for the hold information other than the hold information that is the subject of the hold notice. Or, it may be associated with the number of hold information as in the special hold notice table (for example, FIG. 27A or FIG. 33A) in each of the above embodiments, and the operation that triggered the hold information acquisition. It may be associated with the mouths 33 and 34. Moreover, you may link | relate with the acquisition timing of the holding information. The acquisition timing may be, for example, a difference in acquisition timing between the target hold information and other hold information, or a timing associated with an internal clock using RTC or the like.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of the components to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration composed of combinations of the embodiments, or a part or all of the configurations may be applied in combination.

  (1) In the variable display time specifying process on the production control device 82 side, the variable display time is specified based on the counters C3 and CS and the variable display time table for the hold information of the hold number non-corresponding pattern. The variable display time may be stored in the hold storage area 250 in the process at the time of receiving the hold command (for example, the hold increase processing step S1208), or the hold command output from the main control device 81 may have a variable display time. It may be configured to include information.

  (2) In the timer input process at the time specifying pattern (FIG. 29), in step S1710, the subtraction start timing of the timer counter T may be changed based on the time specified in steps S1701 to S1709. That is, the special condition is less likely to be satisfied by delaying the subtraction start timing, and the special condition is easily satisfied by increasing the subtraction start timing. In this way, by changing the subtraction start timing, the special hold notice can be suitably executed without changing the specified time by adjusting the probability of success or failure of the special condition.

  Further, in the fluctuation start process (step S1303) of the fluctuation display control process (FIG. 38), the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3 is finished in accordance with the end timing of the predetermined set time in the special hold notice. The production pattern may be set. In this case, the effect pattern may be set so that the special condition is satisfied, or the effect pattern may be set so as not to be satisfied. In this case, the success or failure of the special condition may be determined according to the game result of the current game round, or the success or failure of the special condition may be determined according to the game result of other hold information. Further, the success or failure of the special condition may be determined based on the gaming state (the level of the winning / failing lottery mode or the support mode, the number of hold information, etc.).

  (3) In each of the above embodiments, the variable display time has been described as including the fixed time in each game time. However, as it is not included, the fixed time is also grasped separately, and the timer counter T is input and subtracted. It is good also as a structure which performs etc. For example, this configuration may be applied to a gaming machine having a configuration in which the fixed time can be changed according to each game time or gaming state.

  (4) The display of the time display area GE is not limited to the above display, and may be another display. For example, the information may be displayed in a region (for example, the upper right part of the display screen G) that is separate from the image P for the hold information about the special hold notice. Further, for example, the entire display screen G may be displayed so as to overlap with the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is preferable that the time display area GE is displayed behind each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 so as to suppress a decrease in the visibility of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  Further, the display of the time display image Gp is not limited to the above display, and may be another display. That is, the number of digits of display is not limited to the above, that is, the minimum unit of subtraction is not limited to the above. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which displays not a Arabic numeral but a Chinese numeral, and it is good also as an analog display instead of a digital display.

  (5) Although the configuration is such that the type of the holding image P is changed based on the establishment of the special condition, it may be configured to determine whether the special condition is satisfied a plurality of times. In other words, in the above embodiment, the special condition is satisfied that the predetermined set time elapses to 0, but this is changed, and the predetermined set time elapses to 0 or A configuration may be adopted in which winning a lottery at a timing satisfies the special condition.

  For example, a plurality of determination timings are set in the remaining time of a predetermined setting time (for example, five types of determination timings of the remaining 30 sec, 20 sec, 10 sec, 5 sec, and 0 sec are set). Then, it is determined whether or not the type of the holding image P is changed at each determination timing. If it is determined that the holding image P is to be changed, the holding image P is changed. That is, the possibility of changing the number of determination timings is increased. By doing in this way, the opportunity that special conditions are satisfied increases, and it can also increase the frequency | count that special reservation notice is watched.

  (6) The hold image P may be changed gradually in accordance with the passage of a predetermined set time (in accordance with the change in the probability of establishment of the special condition). For example, image data of a plurality of holding images P is provided so that the change from the fourth holding image P4 (yellow) to the third holding image P3 (red) is performed in stages, and a predetermined set time The image data of the hold image P may be updated so that the fourth hold image P4 approaches the third hold image P3 as the value approaches 0. In this case, if the color is different depending on the type of the holding image P as in the above embodiments, the color is updated so that the color gradually approaches the color of the holding image P after the change from before the change to after the change. If the configuration differs depending on the type of the holding image P, the shape may be updated so that the shape gradually approaches the shape of the holding image P after the change from before the change to after the change.

  In these cases, the time input to the timer counter T at the start of the special hold notice is divided by the number to be updated stepwise (for example, 5), and the hold image P is updated every time the divided unit time elapses. It is good to have a configuration to do.

  In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the color and shape of the reserve image P are changed in stages, the player can grasp the probability of establishment of the special condition based on the color and shape of the reserve image P. Therefore, it is good also as a structure which does not display the time display image Gp in the time display area GE. By doing in this way, compared with the structure which can grasp | ascertain remaining time in real time by the time display image Gp, it becomes possible to grasp | ascertain remaining time intuitively and can make production easy to understand. Moreover, by doing in this way, it becomes possible to make it difficult to be understood even if the elapsed speed of the remaining time of the set time and the remaining time are changed, and it is also possible to suitably adjust during the production. In addition, the amount of image data stored in advance can be reduced by the amount that the time display area GE and the time display image Gp are not displayed.

  In addition, the effect indicating the probability of establishment of the special condition can be changed as follows. As shown in FIG. 58 (a), an effect imitating the sunrise of Mt. Fuji may be executed as an effect indicating the probability of establishment of the special condition for the special reservation notice. In this case, an image in which the day has begun to appear from Mt. Fuji is displayed at the start timing (FIG. 59 (a1)), and an image in which the day has completely finished from Mt. Fuji is displayed at the end timing (FIG. 59 (a2)). Thereby, the establishment probability of the special condition can be grasped according to the sunrise condition. In particular, by applying an effect such as sunrise, which the player would potentially recognize without waiting for a relatively long time, to an effect indicating the probability of establishment of the special condition, Even if the production is unfolded for a long time, it is possible to make it look uncomfortable.

  Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which performs the establishment probability of special conditions by the alerting | reporting means (for example, the display light emission part 63 etc.) different from the display screen G. Further, as a different notification means, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), a notification may be made on the screen PG of the portable terminal. In this case, as in the sixth embodiment, the special condition at the time of displaying the code may be displayed on the mobile terminal by reading the code of the special condition, or augmented reality (AR). It is good also as a structure which displays the change of establishment probability in real time on the screen PG of a portable terminal using a technique etc. In this case, the augmented reality markers AR1 to AR4 may be displayed on the special reserve notice image (for example, the time display area GE), or the normal game times image (for example, the background image or the symbol sequence Z1 to Z3). ) May be displayed. When the markers AR1 to AR4 are updated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 sec cycle), the change in the establishment probability can be displayed on the mobile terminal.

  When displaying using a portable terminal etc., it is good also as a structure (FIG. 59 (b1)) which displays the establishment probability of special conditions directly on the display screen G, and abstractly on the screen PG of a portable terminal, Conversely, the display screen G may be abstractly displayed and directly displayed on the screen PG of the mobile terminal (FIG. 59 (b2)).

  (7) In each of the above embodiments, the number of special hold notices that can be executed in duplicate is adjusted using the hold notice counter YK, but this may be changed. In other words, in each of the above-described embodiments, the special hold notice based on the hold information of the outlier result is executed in duplicate up to two, and the special hold notice based on the hold information of the jackpot result is executed up to one ( (No overlap) This may be performed by duplication as many as the number of stored hold information. However, from the viewpoint of suppressing a reduction in the degree of attention and understanding of one special reservation notice due to the overlap of special reservation notices, a configuration that adjusts the number of possible overlaps as in the above embodiment is preferable.

  (8) Character PM and item A are not limited to the above. For example, the character PM may not always be displayed, or a plurality of character PM types may be set so that the player can select which character PM is displayed. Needless to say, the position and size of the character PM displayed are not limited to those described above.

  The item A given as a privilege based on the establishment of the special condition may be, for example, the level of the character PM or an experience value for raising the level.

  (9) As a special condition, the condition is established that a predetermined set time has elapsed and becomes “00.00”. However, the condition is not limited as long as the condition establishment probability changes based on the passage of time. . For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a set time is provided in units of game times such as “30 seconds elapse in the next game time” or “40 seconds elapse within 2 game times”.

  Further, a special condition may be that the number of executions of a predetermined effect that may occur during a game round reaches a predetermined number. Specifically, as a predetermined effect, a reach display may be used, or a notice effect such as a bubble notice or a school of fish notice during a game may be performed. May be a so-called pseudo-continuous effect, or may be an operation instruction effect for the operation button or the like in a gaming machine having an operation button or the like. These effects may be set so that the number of occurrences increases as the variable display time increases. Thereby, it can be set as the conditions from which establishment probability changes based on progress of time. In this case, as a display of the special condition in the special hold notice, for example, a character display such as “Make the XX production appear X times! The hold will change!” May be considered.

  In this case, as in each of the above-described embodiments, the number of occurrences of a predetermined effect necessary for satisfying the condition may be set based on the lottery counter and the number of hold information. A configuration may be adopted in which a production pattern is grasped based on the value of the type counter CS and the like, and the number of occurrences of a predetermined production is grasped, and then the number of times necessary for establishing the condition is set. In any case, the special hold notice can be diversified by making it possible to set whether the condition is satisfied or not.

  (10) While the special hold notice is being executed, the special condition (predetermined set time) is always displayed. However, even if the special condition is not displayed, any condition in which the probability of establishment changes based on the passage of time. As long as the player can grasp that the determination based on is performed, the details about the special condition may not be displayed.

  Further, even when the display is performed, the display may be made so that the player can grasp the special condition at least from the start to the end of the special hold notice. For example, it may be configured to display only at the start of the special hold notice, may be configured to display at a predetermined timing in the middle of the special hold notice, or may be configured to repeatedly display and hide. May be. It should be noted that when not displayed, the visibility of the special reservation notice may be relatively lower than when displayed.

  As a method of non-display, the time display image Gp in the time display region GE is simply not displayed (for example, the time display region GE or the display screen G is partially or completely hidden). Alternatively, it may be configured to be hidden by another image (the time display image Gp is displayed on the back), or may be shielded by a movable accessory or the like so that visual recognition from the front is difficult or impossible. It may be a configuration.

  In this way, even if it is difficult or impossible to visually recognize the time display image Gp, the player can grasp the passage of time with his / her own sense (by counting the number in his head). It becomes possible to create a unique game. In this case, if the player knows the passage of time by himself, only the player can grasp the success or failure of the special condition, and the enjoyment that the superiority to the surrounding players can be obtained can be added. it can. In addition, in a situation where the time display image Gp is not visible, if the subtraction other than the default subtraction is performed, the elapsed time that has been grasped by one's own sense as described above when it becomes visible after that. The possibility that different times are displayed in the time display image Gp increases. As in the above-described embodiments, when the subtraction other than the default subtraction is more likely to occur as the jackpot expectation is higher, the player will display a time different from the time that he / she knew. It is thought that will come to expect. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the enjoyment of grasping the passage of time by itself in a situation where the time display image Gp cannot be visually recognized.

  (11) The determination timing of the special condition is not limited to the high-speed fluctuation end timing of the lower symbol row Z3, and may be another timing. For example, it may be at the start of the game time of the hold information subject to the special hold notice (timing when the hold image P moves to the execution display area Gb), or the hold information of the target hold information It may be a predetermined timing in the game times before the game times. However, the later the judgment timing of the special condition is, the more game times can be related to the success or failure of the special condition, so it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the related game times. Become. In addition, since the determination timing is set as a branch point of an effect during game play (a branch point indicating whether or not reach display occurs in each of the above embodiments), the determination is performed at a timing when the degree of attention is increased. , It can be suppressed that the determination is missed.

  (12) In the special reservation notice, in addition to or instead of each subtraction pattern (default subtraction, subtraction at the time of shift, etc.), a pattern that is subtracted by the player's intervention (for example, operation of the operation unit 75) may be provided. In this case, the degree of subtraction may be different depending on the player's participation degree and skill.

  Specifically, a self-subtraction pattern is added as the subtraction pattern. When this self-subtraction pattern is selected, a predetermined game effect is performed during execution of the special reservation notice. In the predetermined game effect, for example, a point obtained by operation of the operation unit 75 can be changed, such as a rhythm game, a four-choice quiz, an action game, and a shooting game. Then, the subtraction degree of the timer counter T is changed based on the obtained points. That is, if it is a rhythm game, the effect which matches the instruction timing on the display screen G and the operation timing of the operation part 75 over a predetermined period (for example, 15 sec) is executed. If the operation timing matches the instruction timing (if the deviation is within the first predetermined range), subtraction of 4 sec is performed, and if the deviation is more than that (if the deviation is outside the first predetermined range and within the second predetermined range) If there is a subtraction of 2 seconds. If it is further shifted (if it is out of the second predetermined range), no subtraction is performed (0 sec subtraction is performed). In this case, since the number of instruction timings (number of times the game is generated) can be adjusted on the gaming machine side, the success or failure of the special condition is compared with a configuration in which subtraction is performed based only on the player side operation. It can be managed to some extent on the side.

  (13) The subtraction pattern is not limited to the above. For example, a pattern may be set in which a predetermined time is subtracted when the ball enters the upper working port 33, the lower working port 34, or the through gate 35. In this case, since the hold information is acquired based on the ball entering the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34, the subtraction time and the subtraction probability are set based on the hold information (information such as the game result). It is good also as a structure. In this case, as in the seventh embodiment, if the acquired hold information is configured to be the target of the determination of the success prior to the hold information that is the subject of the special hold notice, the game times during the special hold notice The relationship with the variable display time becomes clear.

  (14) The player may be allowed to select a predetermined set time when executing the special hold notice. In other words, if the player predicts the time required from the start to the end of the special reservation notice, and the prediction is correct, the reservation image P may be changed as a privilege. Specifically, at the start of the special hold notice, a plurality of time displays (for example, 30 sec, 45 sec, 60 sec) are performed, and the player selects one time display from among the plurality of time displays. The selection of the time display may be configured based on the operation of the operation unit 75. And when the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol row | line | zone Z3 in the game time used as object is complete | finished within the selected time, it is set as the structure which performs the subtraction corresponding to the selected time display. For example, if 30 sec is selected, 1 sec is subtracted, if 45 sec, 5 sec is subtracted, and if 60 sec, 10 sec is subtracted. Note that the subtraction probability may be changed according to the selected time. Since the player will be interested in whether or not the time selected by himself / herself has elapsed, the degree of attention can be suitably increased.

  (15) In the special hold notice, the predetermined set time is set based on the variable display time of the game times of the hold information that is digested before the hold information subject to the special hold notice. If the configuration is set based on the hold information other than the target hold information, the configuration may be set based on the hold information digested after the target hold information. Even in this case, not only the special reservation notice but also the degree of attention to the game times related to other reservation information can be increased.

  (16) In the shift subtraction process, the predetermined set time is subtracted in accordance with the shift of the hold information. However, the predetermined set time may be added during the shift. In this way, by providing not only the pattern to be subtracted after the fact but also the pattern to be added, the special reservation notice can be focused to the end. Note that the timing of addition is not limited to the shift, and may be another timing.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which changes the probability at the time of addition, and the time at the time of addition according to the kind (for example, type of game result or the image P for hold) of the hold information shifted to the execution area AR.

  (17) The correction of the predetermined set time in the special hold notice is not limited to the type of hold information shifted to the execution area AR and the number of hold information. It is good also as a structure performed according to the operation condition (launch intensity | strength and firing duration).

  (18) Although the configuration is such that the presence / absence of subtraction during the shift and the subtraction time are determined each time the hold information is shifted, a configuration may be used in which the special hold notice is started or at other timings. If the configuration is performed at the start, the time can be set in consideration of the shift subtraction. However, if the configuration is determined after the fact, the player can feel that the probability of establishment of the special condition changes according to the game situation, and the result is predicted at the start of the production as in the so-called race. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience such as.

  (19) Difficulty in establishing the special condition at the start (the length of a predetermined set time) when determining the change-destination holding image from the fourth holding image P4 by lottery or the like based on the establishment of the special condition Depending on the situation, the change-destination holding image may be different. Further, the change-destination holding image is not limited to the holding image having the higher jackpot expectation, but may be configured to include a pattern that becomes a lower holding image.

  (20) In the special hold notice, the predetermined set time is set by the hold information different from the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice, but the execution mode in the special hold notice is set by the different hold information. If it is the structure to set, the aspect set with the said different hold information is not limited to said thing. For example, in the special hold notice, a predetermined set time (special condition) is set based on the variable display time for the different hold information, and the hold image that changes based on the establishment of the special condition is set as the game result of the different hold information. It is good also as a structure set based on.

  Further, the special hold notice is set to be the same effect as the normal hold notice in each of the above embodiments, and it is set which of the hold images P1 to P5 is to be displayed based on the different hold information. The display image may be set based on the different hold information as a hold notice different from the normal hold notice.

  Even in these cases, the execution mode may be set at the start of the special reservation notice, or the execution mode may be set after the start. The configuration that is set after the start can reproduce the state set according to the game situation, and the execution mode can be diversified.

  (21) The special reservation notice is configured such that the probability of execution increases as the number of reservations at the time of reservation acquisition increases. However, the probability of execution may decrease as the number of reservations increases. Moreover, it is good also as a structure where the probability of performing becomes high or low, so that the variable display time of the pending | holding information held or the pending | holding information of the game time being performed is long. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which sets the setting time of a special reservation advance notice according to the fluctuation display time of the hold information on hold or the hold information of the game time being executed.

  (22) In each of the above embodiments, the display control device 212 is controlled by the effect control device 82 based on the command output from the main control device 81, but instead, from the main control device 81. The display control device 212 may be configured to control the effect control device 82 based on the output command. Further, instead of the configuration in which the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 are separately provided, the control devices 82 and 212 may be provided as a single sub-side control device. Further, the function of the effect control device 82 or the display control device 212 may be integrated into the main control device 81, and the function of both the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 is integrated into the main control device 81. It is good.

  (23) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right if a player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  In addition, the hold information is acquired based on a winning at the operation ports 33 and 34. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a start lever is provided, and the hold information is acquired based on the operation of the start lever. It is good also as a structure to be made. In short, the condition for obtaining the hold information is arbitrary.

  (24) Non-ball game machines, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, start rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start the rotation of the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

  The invention described in each of the following features is as follows: `` In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, for example, the gaming state is triggered by the game ball entering the start ball entering part provided in the game area. For example, in the display device provided in the game area, the display of the variation of the picture is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed. Regarding the technical background, “a display effect for one game time is displayed in which a stop result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed at the time of final stop display of display” (see, for example, JP-A-2004-81853). Here, in the gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect. ”The present invention has been made with a problem to be solved.

  In addition, the inventions described in the following feature groups may be individually combined in different feature groups, and applied to the invention described in different feature groups by combining some or all of the inventions. Also good.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. In a gaming machine capable of granting a privilege (for example, opening / closing execution mode or high-frequency support mode) based on the result of the game,
Launching means for launching a game ball into the game area (game ball launching mechanism 53);
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball-entry unit (means for executing a winning process for the operation port by the main control device 81);
Based on the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, grant determination means (function to execute the determination process by the main controller 81) for determining whether to grant the privilege to the player;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, effect setting means (game control by the main control device 81) for setting an effect (for example, a game turn effect or a hold notice) performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41). Processing function), and
An effect executing means (function for executing a variable display control process by the effect control device 82) for executing the effect set by the effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
When the effect set by the effect setting means is a predetermined effect (holding notice), a special effect (special hold notice) different from that is sent to the predetermined notifying means or different from it. Special effect execution means (function to execute special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) that can be executed by the notification means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  Special information is acquired on the basis of the game ball entering a pitching portion provided in the game area, and whether or not a privilege is granted is determined based on the special information. In a gaming machine in which an effect is executed by predetermined notification means based on the above, for example, when this effect is a so-called game-time effect for notifying the result of each grant determination, the effect for that game time If the predetermined period of the operation is long and the period until the result of the grant determination corresponding to the predetermined stage is informed is long, the player will wait until then, and this period is redundant. There is a possibility that you will feel it. In addition, for example, in a gaming machine capable of storing a plurality of special information, if this predetermined effect is a so-called pre-read effect corresponding to a plurality of special information ahead, other special information is given up to the special information. Since the result of the determination is notified, the player waits until the result of the determination for giving the special information corresponding to the predetermined effect is notified. Therefore, when such a predetermined effect is set, if a configuration in which a special effect different from that is executed by a predetermined notification means or a different notification means, the grant determination based on the predetermined effect is performed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a feeling of extension until the result is notified. As a result, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  If the special effect is not executed in place of the predetermined effect, but is executed in parallel with the predetermined effect, the above-described effects due to the execution of the special effect can be suitably achieved.

  In addition, if it is determined whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the special effect, and the privilege is given based on the determination result, it is possible to further increase the degree of attention to the special effect. It becomes. In this case, if the privilege granted based on the special information is the first privilege and the privilege granted based on the special performance is expressed as the second privilege, the two can be clearly distinguished. And if it is set as the structure which performs grant determination about the 2nd privilege provided based on a special effect based on the information different from the result of the grant determination of the 1st privilege used as the opportunity of a predetermined effect, the predetermined effect It is clear that the special effects are different from the special effects, and each effect can be suitably enjoyed.

Feature A2. In a gaming machine capable of granting a privilege (for example, opening / closing execution mode or high-frequency support mode) based on the result of the game,
Launching means for launching a game ball into the game area (game ball launching mechanism 53);
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball-entry unit (means for executing a winning process for the operation port by the main control device 81);
Based on the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, grant determination means (function to execute the determination process by the main controller 81) for determining whether to grant the privilege to the player;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, an effect setting means for setting an effect (game turn effect) to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) (game time control processing by the main control device 81 is executed). Function)
An effect executing means (function for executing a variable display control process by the effect control device 82) for executing the effect set by the effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
With
The effect setting means starts a game turn operation as the effect based on the grant determination, and ends the game turn operation as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination as one game time. , To set the operation for the game times in each game time,
A plurality of execution modes including at least a short-term mode in which the operation period is a short period and a long-term mode in which the operation period is longer than the short-term mode are set in the operation for game times. The game replay operation is performed in the set execution mode,
When the operation mode of the game turning operation set by the effect setting unit is the long-term mode, a special effect (special hold notice) is sent by the predetermined notifying unit or another notifying unit. A gaming machine comprising a special effect execution means (a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) that can be executed.

  Special information is acquired on the basis of the game ball entering a pitching portion provided in the game area, and whether or not a privilege is granted is determined based on the special information. In a gaming machine in which a game turning operation as a game turning effect is executed by a predetermined notification means based on the above, when a long-term aspect is set that has a long operation period of the game turning action There is a possibility that the period until the corresponding grant determination result is notified becomes longer, and this period is perceived as redundant. Therefore, when such a game-return operation that is a long-term mode is set, if the special effect is executed by a predetermined notification means or another notification means, the game-return operation is performed. Based on this, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the feeling of extension until the result of the determination of grant is notified. As a result, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  Note that if the special effect is not executed instead of the long-term game turning operation, but is executed in parallel with the game turning operation, the special effect is executed. An effect can be suitably produced.

  In addition, if it is determined whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the special effect, and the privilege is given based on the determination result, it is possible to further increase the degree of attention to the special effect. It becomes. In this case, if the privilege granted based on the special information is the first privilege and the privilege granted based on the special performance is expressed as the second privilege, the two can be clearly distinguished. And if it is set as the structure which performs the grant determination about the 2nd privilege provided based on a special effect based on the information different from the result of the grant determination of the 1st privilege used as the opportunity of operation for game rotation, It becomes clear that the operation for game rotation and the special effect are different effects, and each effect can be suitably enjoyed.

Feature A3. In a gaming machine capable of granting a privilege (for example, opening / closing execution mode or high-frequency support mode) based on the result of the game,
Launching means for launching a game ball into the game area (game ball launching mechanism 53);
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball-entry unit (means for executing a winning process for the operation port by the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number that is a plurality of predetermined numbers (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81);
Based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, grant determination means for sequentially determining whether or not to grant the privilege to the player (a function for executing the determination processing by the main control device 81) )When,
When the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the grant determination at a timing earlier than the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination by the grant determination means. A destination specifying means for specifying information corresponding to the result of the grant determination (function for executing a confirmation process for holding by the main control device 81);
An effect that is performed at a timing earlier than the predetermined special information is subject to the determination of the application by the application determination unit, in the predetermined notification unit (symbol display device 41) based on the result of the specification by the target specifying unit. Production setting means for setting (holding advance notice) (function for executing processing for holding display by the production control device 82);
An effect executing means (function for executing a hold increasing process by the effect control device 82) for executing the effect set by the effect setting means by the predetermined notifying means;
When the effect set by the effect setting means is a predetermined effect (for example, the second hold image P2) determined in advance, a special effect (special hold notice) different from that is given to the predetermined notification means. Or special effect execution means (function to execute special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) that can be executed by a different notification means, and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In a gaming machine in which special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a ball entering part provided in the game area, and whether or not a privilege is granted based on the special information is determined. This special information can be stored up to a predetermined number that is a plurality of numbers, and information corresponding to the result of the grant determination is specified at a timing earlier than the grant determination is performed on the predetermined special information, An effect based on the specified information, a so-called prefetch effect, is performed by a predetermined notification means. If this effect is a predetermined effect, a special effect different from the effect is performed by a predetermined notification unit or a different notification unit. In this case, for example, even if the player predicts or grasps that the result of the grant determination corresponding to the effect is a result that can obtain a privilege based on a predetermined effect, and wants to obtain the privilege early Since the predetermined effect is performed before the special information is subjected to the determination of grant, it is necessary to wait for the grant determination. Therefore, there is a possibility that this period is felt redundant. Therefore, when such a predetermined effect is set, if a configuration in which a special effect different from that is executed by a predetermined notification means or a different notification means, the grant determination based on the predetermined effect is performed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a feeling of extension until the result is notified. As a result, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  In addition, if the special effect is not executed instead of the predetermined effect but is executed in parallel with the predetermined effect, the above-described effect due to the execution of another effect can be suitably achieved. .

  In addition, if it is determined whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the special effect, and the privilege is given based on the determination result, it is possible to further increase the degree of attention to the special effect. It becomes. In this case, if the privilege granted based on the special information is the first privilege and the privilege granted based on the special performance is expressed as the second privilege, the two can be clearly distinguished. And if it is set as the structure which performs grant determination about the 2nd privilege provided based on a special effect based on the information different from the result of the grant determination of the 1st privilege used as the opportunity of a predetermined effect, the predetermined effect It is clear that the special effects are different from the special effects, and each effect can be suitably enjoyed.

  Furthermore, if the predetermined effect is an effect in which the degree of expectation to which the first privilege is granted is higher than other effects, when the predetermined effect is performed, the determination of giving the special information corresponding thereto is quicker. The player should think so as to be performed, and by doing so, it is possible to more suitably achieve the effect of performing the special effect as described above.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. In a gaming machine capable of granting a privilege (for example, opening / closing execution mode or high-frequency support mode) based on the result of the game,
Launching means for launching a game ball into the game area (game ball launching mechanism 53);
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball-entry unit (means for executing a winning process for the operation port by the main control device 81);
Based on the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, grant determination means (function to execute the determination process by the main controller 81) for determining whether to grant the privilege to the player;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, effect setting means (game control by the main control device 81) for setting an effect (for example, a game turn effect or a hold notice) performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41). Processing function), and
An effect executing means (function for executing a variable display control process by the effect control device 82) for executing the effect set by the effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
When the effect set by the effect setting means is a predetermined effect (holding notice), a special effect (special hold notice) different from that is sent to the predetermined notifying means or different from it. Special effect execution means (function to execute special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) that can be executed by the notification means;
In the special effect executed by the special effect execution means, a determination means (timer management process by the effect control device 82) for determining whether or not a special condition in which the establishment probability changes based on the passage of a predetermined setting period is satisfied. Function to execute)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  Special information is acquired on the basis of the game ball entering a pitching portion provided in the game area, and whether or not a privilege is granted is determined based on the special information. In a gaming machine in which an effect is executed by predetermined notification means based on the above, for example, when this effect is a so-called game-time effect for notifying the result of each grant determination, the effect for that game time If the predetermined period of the operation is long and the period until the result of the grant determination corresponding to the predetermined stage is informed is long, the player will wait until then, and this period is redundant. There is a possibility that you will feel it. Further, for example, in a gaming machine capable of storing a plurality of special information, if this predetermined effect is a so-called pre-read effect corresponding to a plurality of special information ahead, it is determined whether to give other special information before the special information. Therefore, the player waits until the result of the grant determination for the special information corresponding to the predetermined effect is notified. On the other hand, if the operation period of the predetermined effect is short or the number of special information stored is small, it may be difficult to perform a sufficient effect, which may give the player a lack of effect.

  Therefore, when this predetermined effect is selected, the special effect is executed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means, and the probability of establishment is determined based on the passage of the predetermined setting period in this special effect. The configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the changing special condition is satisfied. Therefore, for example, if the effect is varied depending on the success or failure of this special condition or a privilege is given, it becomes possible to draw attention to the length of the period during which this special effect is performed. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a feeling of extension for a period until the result of the determination of grant based on the predetermined effect is notified, and to appropriately suppress a decrease in interest, and conversely, the operation period of the predetermined effect is short. If a special effect is performed in this case, it can be expected that the degree of attention will increase as the special effect is performed in addition to the predetermined effect, and a decrease in interest can be suitably suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  If the special effect is not executed in place of the predetermined effect, but is executed in parallel with the predetermined effect, the above-described effects due to the execution of the special effect can be suitably achieved.

  Moreover, if it is set as the structure which provides a privilege based on establishment of special conditions (determination result of the determination means), it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to this special effect more. In this case, if the privilege granted based on the special information is the first privilege and the privilege granted based on the establishment of the special condition is expressed as the second privilege, it is possible to clearly distinguish both. And if it is set as the structure which performs the grant determination about the 2nd privilege given based on establishment of special conditions based on the information different from the result of the grant determination of the 1st privilege used as the opportunity of predetermined | prescribed effect, It is clear that the predetermined effect and the special effect are different effects, and each effect can be suitably enjoyed.

  If the “special condition in which the probability of establishment changes based on the passage of the predetermined setting period” is the “special condition in which the probability of establishment increases based on the passage of the predetermined setting period”, the grant determination based on the predetermined performance is performed. The longer the period until it is performed, the more easily the special condition is satisfied, and the inconvenience of making the previous period feel redundant can be avoided.

  Further, if the “special condition that the probability of establishment changes based on the lapse of the predetermined setting period” is the “special condition that the probability of establishment decreases based on the lapse of the predetermined setting period”, the grant determination based on the predetermined effect is performed. The shorter the period until it is performed, the easier it is to establish special conditions. Even if the period until then is short and sufficient production (special production) cannot be performed, special conditions are easily established, so there is a lack of production. The feeling can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when providing a means for granting a privilege based on the establishment of the special condition, a configuration in which “the privilege is not granted when the determination unit determines that the special condition is not satisfied” is provided. The degree of attention about whether or not the special condition is satisfied can be more suitably increased.

  Then, the configuration of the “determination means” is changed to “a special condition in which the establishment probability changes based on the elapse of a predetermined setting period in the special effect executed by the special effect execution unit at a predetermined timing in the predetermined effect. By using the “determination unit that determines whether or not it is established”, the determination timing of the determination unit becomes clearer. If the predetermined timing is “timing before the end timing of the predetermined performance”, the continuation of the predetermined performance can be enjoyed in a situation where the success or failure of the special condition is determined. If the content of the predetermined effect is varied based on the above, it is possible to clearly feel the superiority that the special condition is satisfied through the predetermined effect.

If the effect set by the “effect setting means” is an effect for game times, a special effect is performed when a predetermined effect is set among the effects for game play. The degree of attention of the game times to be performed can be suitably increased. As a specific configuration in this case, the configuration of “production execution means” and “special production execution means”
“The effect execution means starts a game turn operation as the effect based on the grant determination, and ends the game turn operation as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. As an example, the operation for the game times in each game time is executed by the predetermined notification means,
A plurality of execution modes including at least a short-term mode in which the operation period is a short period and a long-term mode in which the operation period is longer than the short-term mode are set in the operation for game times. The game replay operation is performed in the set execution mode,
When the operation mode of the game turning operation set by the effect setting unit is the long-term mode, a special effect (special hold notice) is sent by the predetermined notifying unit or another notifying unit. Special effect execution means that can be executed (a function to execute special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) "
It is good to do.

Further, if the effect set by the “effect setting means” is an effect of a so-called pre-reading notice (holding notice), a special effect is performed when a predetermined effect is set in the pre-reading notice, and the predetermined effect is performed. It is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention during the period until the game is played on the special information that has been triggered. A specific configuration in this case is as follows: “Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number that is a plurality of predetermined numbers (by the main control device 81) The function of executing the process of step S205) "and the configuration of the" granting determination means "is given to the player based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means Grant determination means for sequentially determining whether or not to grant (a function for executing the determination process by the main control device 81) ",
Furthermore, “with respect to the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit, the predetermined determination information is determined to be the target of the determination of the application at a timing earlier than the predetermined determination of the specific determination information. A destination specifying means for specifying information corresponding to the result of the grant determination in the case of becoming (a function of executing a holding confirmation process by the main control device 81);
An effect that is performed at a timing earlier than the predetermined special information is subject to the determination of the application by the application determination unit, in the predetermined notification unit (symbol display device 41) based on the result of the specification by the target specifying unit. Production setting means for setting (holding advance notice) (function for executing processing for holding display by the production control device 82);
An effect executing means (function for executing a hold increasing process by the effect control device 82) for executing the effect set by the effect setting means by the predetermined notifying means;
When the effect set by the effect setting means is a predetermined effect (for example, the second holding image P2) determined in advance, a special effect (special hold notice) different from that is given to the predetermined notification means. Or a special effect execution means (function to execute a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) that can be executed by a different notification means. "
It is good to do.

  Feature B2. Feature B1 characterized by comprising condition notifying means (function for executing special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) for notifying the special condition by the predetermined notifying means or different notifying means. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above configuration, the player can be made aware of the special conditions. As a result, the relationship between the predetermined setting period related to the establishment probability of the special condition and the special effect becomes clear, and the probability of establishment of the special condition depends on the length of the special effect period, that is, the length of the predetermined effect period. You can fully enjoy the change.

  Feature B3. The condition notifying means includes a prior notifying means (a function for executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) for notifying the special condition at a timing earlier than the determination by the determining means. The gaming machine according to Feature B2, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the special condition at a timing earlier than the determination of success or failure. Since special conditions change with the passage of time, the probability of establishment changes, so if you understand the special conditions at the earliest possible timing, you can fully enjoy whether or not the special conditions are satisfied. .

  Feature B4. The destination notification means includes means for performing notification of the special condition based on the start of the elapse of the predetermined setting period (function for executing special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to Feature B3, which is characterized.

  According to the above configuration, since the special condition is notified based on the start of the predetermined elapsed period, it is possible to enjoy the success or failure of the period related to the success or failure of the special condition.

  Feature B5. The destination notifying means includes means for executing notification of the special condition (function of executing special hold notice control processing by the effect control device 82) in the course of the predetermined setting period. The gaming machine according to Feature B3 or Feature B4.

  According to the above configuration, since the special condition is notified in the course of the predetermined set period, the player can be made aware of the change in the probability of establishment of the special condition. This makes it possible for the player to clearly understand the relationship between the period during which the special performance is performed and the probability of establishment of the special condition.

  Feature B6. The condition notifying means includes post-notification means (function of executing the process of step S2701 by the effect control device 82) for notifying the special condition at a timing after the determination by the determining means is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B5.

  According to the said structure, it can grasp | ascertain even after the determination by a determination means about special conditions. That is, the success or failure of the special condition can be grasped even after the determination timing. By doing in this way, it is possible to leave interest about whether or not the special condition is satisfied as a remnant even after the timing of giving it, and to prevent the degree of attention from being extremely lowered after the determination. it can.

  Feature B7. The post-notification means performs notification regarding the establishment probability at the time of determination by the determination means as notification of the special condition, and the gaming machine according to feature B6.

  According to the above configuration, since the notification regarding the establishment probability at the time of determination is performed, it is possible to grasp not only the success / failure of the special condition but also the degree thereof. Therefore, for example, when the special condition is not satisfied, it is possible to grasp how long the special condition is satisfied later, and it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the degree of attention based on the fact that the special condition is not satisfied. .

Feature B8. The acquisition information storage means (function to execute processing of Step S205 by main controller 81) which stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number which is a predetermined number is provided. ,
The grant determination means sequentially performs the grant determination on the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means,
Destination specifying means (for holding by the main control device 81) for specifying information on the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing earlier than the predetermined special information is subject to the determination of grant. Function to execute the confirmation process), and
Condition setting means for setting the special condition based on the result of specification by the destination specifying means (function for executing special hold notice setting processing by the production control device 82);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, comprising:

  According to the said structure, a special condition is set based on the information of the predetermined special information memorize | stored in the acquisition information storage means. Therefore, a game of predicting predetermined special information from the special conditions is added, and the game can be diversified. That is, by associating the special condition with special information that triggers the grant determination by the grant determination unit, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention regarding the success or failure of the special condition.

  The “special condition” set by the condition setting means can be simply rephrased as “predetermined set period”, or can be rephrased as “special condition at the start of the predetermined set period”.

Feature B9. Based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, the game turning operation is started by the predetermined notifying means or a different notifying means, and the game is obtained as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. It is provided with game time control means (function to execute a game time control process by the main control device 81) to make the game time operation to be performed once to end the game operation,
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game replay operation is performed over the operation period,
The destination specifying means uses the information on the operation period set by the operation period setting means as a timing before the game times to be set by the operation period setting means are executed by the game time control means. A pre-operation period specifying means (function for executing the effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82),
The condition setting means includes first setting means (a function for executing timer input processing at the time specifying pattern by the effect control device 82) for setting the special condition based on the specifying result of the preceding operation period specifying means. The gaming machine according to Feature B8, wherein

  According to the above configuration, the special condition is set based on the information on the operation period specified by the previous operation period specifying means. Therefore, the relevance between the special condition and the operation period in game play can be further increased, and the establishment probability of whether or not the special condition is satisfied can be associated with the length of the operation period. Therefore, the effect can be suitably executed.

  Feature B10. The condition setting means includes second setting means (a function for executing timer input processing at the time of a normal pattern by the effect control device 82) for setting the special condition regardless of the specification result by the previous operation period specifying means. The gaming machine according to Feature B9, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, when the operation period cannot be specified first by the previous operation period specifying unit, for example, even when the operation period is determined only at the start of the game round, the special condition is set by the second setting unit. It becomes possible to set. Therefore, the effect can be suitably executed.

Feature B11. In the gaming state, a special gaming state in which the operation period can be specified by the previous operation period specifying means for any special information is set.
The gaming machine according to Feature B9 or Feature B10, wherein the special condition is set during the special gaming state.

  According to the above configuration, if any special information is in the special gaming state, the information of the operation period can be specified in advance even if any special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, and special conditions are set in such a state. By doing so, there is no inconvenience that information on the operation period cannot be specified. Thereby, it is possible to suitably realize an effect using special conditions.

Feature B12. In the operation period set by the operation period setting means, a first operation period (holding number correspondence pattern) that reflects a gaming situation (for example, the number of holdings) when the granting determination by the granting determination unit is performed, The second operation period (holding number non-correspondence pattern) that is not so, is included,
The prior operation period specifying means includes means for specifying an operation period for the special information to be the second operation period (a function for performing an effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features B9 to B11.

  Since the game situation at the time of acquisition of the special information and the game situation at the time of grant determination may be different, even if the operation period is specified at a timing earlier than the target of the grant determination, specification by the previous action period specifying means The operation period at the time may be different from the operation period at the time of grant determination. Therefore, in the above configuration, the operation based on the difference in the game situation is performed because the second action period is specified at a timing earlier than the target of the determination of grant, not the first action period in which such a game situation is reflected. It is possible to avoid inconvenience related to the prior specification of the period. As a result, it is possible to suitably perform an effect using the operation period.

  If the present configuration is applied to the feature B9, “the first setting means is configured to perform the special operation based on the operation period specified by the means for specifying the operation period for the special information that is the second operation period. It is preferable to have a configuration of “setting conditions”.

  Feature B13. The prior operation period specifying unit specifies a provisional operation period as an operation period for the special information when the operation period for the special information to be specified is the first operation period. The gaming machine according to Feature B12, further comprising provisional specifying means (a function of executing special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82 in the fourth embodiment).

  Even if the operation period can be different based on the difference in the gaming situation as in the above configuration, if it is specified as a provisional operation period, it is possible to produce an effect based on the success or failure of the special condition. In other words, even if the operation period cannot be specified in advance, it is possible to suppress the monotonization of the effect by leaving room for the effect.

  If the present configuration is applied to the feature B10, the “second setting unit may set the special condition based on the temporary operation period specified by the temporary specifying unit”.

Feature B14. The special condition is set so that the probability of establishment increases as the predetermined setting period elapses,
The provisional specifying means specifies a period that is not more than the shortest period among the first operation periods that can be set by the operation period setting means as the provisional operation period. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above configuration, since the operation period to be temporarily specified can be patterned in advance, the processing configuration related to temporary specification can be simplified. In addition, since the provisional specific period is equal to or shorter than the shortest period that can be changed thereafter, the probability of establishment of the special condition is set to be higher than the highest probability of establishment. Here, if the probability of the special condition is extremely low, the player may become accustomed to the fact that the special condition is not satisfied in another production different from the special production, and the interest in the success or failure of the special condition may be diminished. There is. Therefore, by making the special condition easy to be satisfied as in the above configuration, it is possible to avoid a reduction in the degree of attention due to a decrease in the probability of establishment due to provisional specification.

Feature B15. The special condition is set so that the probability of establishment increases as the predetermined setting period elapses,
The temporary specifying means specifies a period that is longer than the longest period among the first operation periods that can be set by the operation period setting means as the temporary operation period,
Means (in the fourth embodiment) for correcting the special condition at a timing later than the timing at which the provision by the provisional identification means is performed and before the determination by the determination means. The game machine according to Feature B13 or Feature B14, further including a function of executing subtraction processing during shift by the effect control device 82).

  According to the above configuration, since the operation period to be temporarily specified can be patterned in advance, the processing configuration related to temporary specification can be simplified. In addition, since the provisional specific period is equal to or longer than the longest period that can change thereafter, the establishment probability of the special condition is set to be equal to or less than the lowest establishment probability. Therefore, in the above-described configuration, the special condition is corrected thereafter, so that a reduction in the degree of attention due to a decrease in the establishment probability due to provisional specification can be avoided.

  The “correction” may be, for example, a configuration of “shortening / extending the predetermined setting period”, and more specifically, “the provisional operation period and the operation for the predetermined setting period”. A configuration is conceivable in which the difference between the operation period set by the period setting means and the operation period is shortened / extended.

Feature B16. The acquisition information storage means (function to execute processing of Step S205 by main controller 81) which stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number which is a predetermined number is provided. ,
The grant determination means sequentially performs grant determination as to whether or not to grant the privilege to a player based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
When the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the grant determination at a timing earlier than the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination by the grant determination means. Including a destination specifying means (a function for executing a holding confirmation process by the main control device 81) for specifying information corresponding to the result of the grant determination of
The effect setting means is configured such that the predetermined notification information (symbol display device 41) is based on the result of specification by the destination specifying means, and the predetermined special information is subject to the application determination by the application determination means. Set the production (holding notice) to be performed at the previous timing,
The production execution means provides the grant when the predetermined special information that is the specific target is the target of the grant determination based on the specific result by the destination specifying means being a predetermined result. A special notification (holding notice) corresponding to the determination result is sent to the predetermined notification means or a separate notification means at a timing earlier than the result of the determination of grant regarding the predetermined special information. To execute
The special effect executing means is configured to notify the special effect of the special notification or the separate notification based on the fact that the content of the special notification executed by the effect execution means corresponds to the predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B15, wherein the gaming machine is executed by means.

  According to the said structure, special alerting | reporting may be performed before it becomes the object of grant determination about the predetermined | prescribed special information memorize | stored in the acquisition information storage means. As a result, it is possible to perform a game in which the predetermined special information targeted by the first specifying unit is predicted before the result of the determination on the addition of the predetermined special information is notified. Diversification will be achieved. Therefore, the attention degree of the game can be increased. When performing such special notification, if the special notification is such that a privilege is easily given to the player, the degree of attention to the special notification is increased while the degree of attention to the production of other special information is increased. There is a possibility of lowering. Moreover, if it is a special alert | report which makes it difficult to give a privilege, not only the special alert | report but the attention degree to the subsequent production may fall extremely. Therefore, for example, when a predetermined effect is set as the special notification, if the special effect is performed in the predetermined notification means or a different notification means, the degree of attention can be reduced by performing the special notification. Attention is paid to the special performance side, and it is possible to suitably avoid a decrease in interest.

Feature B17. Based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, the game turning operation is started by the predetermined notifying means or a different notifying means, and the game is obtained as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. It is provided with game time control means (function to execute a game time control process by the main control device 81) to make the game time operation to be performed once to end the game operation,
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game replay operation is performed over the operation period,
The destination specifying means uses the information on the operation period set by the operation period setting means as a timing before the game times to be set by the operation period setting means are executed by the game time control means. A pre-operation period specifying means (function for executing the effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82),
Feature B16, comprising: condition setting means for setting the special condition (a function for executing special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) based on the result of specification by the prior operation period specifying means The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, the special condition is set based on the information on the operation period in the special effect executed based on the fact that the content of the special notification is the predetermined effect. Thereby, the special alerting | reporting performed based on predetermined | prescribed special information and the information of an operation period can be linked | related.

  In this case, with regard to special notification, notification regarding predetermined special information is performed, and the special condition in the special effect executed based on the special notification is set based on an operation period other than the predetermined special information. It may be a configuration that is set based on an operation period of predetermined special information. In the former case, it is possible to increase the degree of attention with respect to other special information by means of special effects while increasing the degree of attention with respect to predetermined special information through special notification. In the latter case, the special notice and the special effect can be more closely associated. For example, when the effect that suggests that the privilege is difficult to be given in the special notice is performed, the special condition is established in the special effect. It is possible to diversify the production by, for example, a configuration that performs easy production.

  Feature B18. The condition setting means is a target of the grant determination before the predetermined special information that is a target of the special notification in the special notification triggered by the execution of the special effect by the special effect execution means. The gaming machine according to Feature B17, wherein the special condition is set for the special information based on the operation period specified by the previous operation period specifying means.

  According to the above configuration, the special condition is set based on the operation period of the special information that is the target of the grant determination before the special information that is the target of the special notification. It is possible to increase the interest in the operation period of the game times for the special information subject to the grant determination before the information, and to avoid a decrease in the degree of attention to the effects for other game times by performing the special notification Is possible.

Feature B19. Based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, the game turning operation is started by the predetermined notifying means or a different notifying means, and the game is obtained as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. It is provided with game time control means (function to execute a game time control process by the main control device 81) to make the game time operation to be performed once to end the game operation,
In the game turn action by the game turn control means, the first action (reach occurrence) and the privilege more than the first action at a timing prior to notifying the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means. Branch timing (high-speed fluctuation end timing of the lower symbol sequence Z3) is set to branch to the second operation (reach non-occurrence) where the grant probability of is low,
The determination means is configured to determine whether or not the special condition is successful at the branch timing in the game rotation operation for the special information triggered by the special condition. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the above configuration, the success or failure of the special condition is determined at the branch timing between the first operation and the second operation. Further, at this branching timing, the probability that a privilege is given increases if the game-returning action branches to the first action, while the granting probability becomes lower if it branches to the second action. In this case, it may be possible to further add a branch effect associated with the level of the probability of grant, but if the effect is too complex, there is a concern that the player's understanding will be reduced, and as a result, the interest in the game It may be faded. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the special condition different from the privilege is determined at this branch timing, it is possible to suitably execute a plurality of branch effects related to the privilege grant while suppressing the complication of the game.

  Feature B20. Change means that can change the elapsed speed of the predetermined setting period from the previous elapsed speed or change the remaining period of the predetermined setting period from the remaining period until then (subtraction value adjustment by the effect control device 82) A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B19, wherein the gaming machine has a function of executing a process.

  According to the above configuration, the probability of establishment of the special condition changes as the elapsed speed of the predetermined set period or the remaining period changes. Thus, for example, even if the special condition is not likely to be satisfied, the special condition can be satisfied by changing the elapsed speed or the remaining period, and for example, the special condition is likely to be satisfied. Even so, the special condition may not be satisfied by changing the elapsed speed or the remaining period. That is, the success / failure process of the special condition can be varied, and the degree of attention to the production can be suitably increased.

Feature B21. Based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, the game turning operation is started by the predetermined notifying means or a different notifying means, and the game is obtained as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. It is provided with game time control means (function to execute a game time control process by the main control device 81) to make the game time operation to be performed once to end the game operation,
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game replay operation is performed over the operation period,
The gaming machine according to Feature B20, wherein the changing means changes the time according to the operation period set by the operation period setting means.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to further increase the relevance of the establishment probability of the special condition with the operation period, and it is possible to suitably avoid inconveniences based on the length of the operation period of game times.

Feature B22. The special condition is set so that the probability of establishment increases as the predetermined setting period elapses,
The game machine according to Feature B21, wherein the changing means increases the elapsed speed to be changed or shortens the remaining period to be changed as the operation period is shorter.

  According to the above configuration, when the operation period is short, the period during which the predetermined set period elapses is also shortened, so the probability of establishment of the special condition can be lowered. In such a case, the elapsed speed is increased or the remaining time is increased. If the period is changed so as to be shortened, it is possible to prevent the interest from diminishing by predicting that the special condition is not satisfied due to the short operation period.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Launching means for launching a game ball into the game area (game ball launching mechanism 53);
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball-entry unit (means for executing a winning process for the operation port by the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number that is a plurality of predetermined numbers (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81);
For the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, a grant determining means (main control device 81) for sequentially determining whether to give a player a privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode). A function to execute the pass / fail determination process by
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result corresponding to granting the privilege to the player, the privilege granting unit (by the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player A function for executing the game state transition process), and
Based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) starts a game turn operation, and the game times are notified as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. The game operation is terminated once, and the predetermined notification means is controlled so that the game operation is performed (the function of executing the game operation control process by the main controller 81). )When,
For the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information corresponding to the result of the determination of grant when the predetermined special information becomes the target of the determination of grant, the predetermined special information of the grant determination A prior result specifying means (function for executing a confirmation process for holding by the main control device 81) for specifying at a timing earlier than the target;
Corresponding to the result of the grant determination when the specified special information that is the specified target is the target of the grant determination based on the specified result by the prior result specifying means being the specified result Special notification executing means for executing the special notification to be performed by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means (function for executing the hold control command corresponding processing by the effect control device 82);
With
The special notification executing means is a setting means (second second) capable of setting an execution mode of the special notification based on the special information different from the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A gaming machine having a function of executing subtraction processing during shifting in the embodiment.

  According to the said structure, special alerting | reporting may be performed before it becomes the object of grant determination about the predetermined | prescribed special information memorize | stored in the acquisition information storage means. As a result, it is possible to perform a game in which the predetermined special information targeted by the previous result specifying means is predicted before the game times corresponding to the predetermined special information. Figured. Therefore, the attention degree of the game can be increased. Here, in a gaming machine in which such game times and special notifications are performed in parallel, if the presentation is flashy with respect to special notifications, the degree of attention to the special notifications can be increased, but the game times being executed There is a possibility that the degree of attention to will decrease. Therefore, the gaming machine is provided with a setting unit that can set the execution mode of the special notification based on the special information different from the predetermined special information that triggers the execution of the special notification for the special notification. Thus, based on the special notification, it is possible to associate not only predetermined special information but also other special information, and the degree of attention can be increased for other special information. This makes it possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  In addition, the “setting unit that allows the execution mode of the special notification to be set” can be rephrased as “the changing unit that enables the execution mode of the special notification to be changed”.

  Feature C2. The game machine according to Feature C1, wherein the setting means is capable of setting an execution mode of the special notification after the special notification is started.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to set the execution mode of the special notification based on the other special information during execution of the special notification about the predetermined special information. In this way, it is possible to execute special notification in consideration of not only the situation at the time of the start of special notification (presence or absence of other special information, type, etc.) but also the situation after the start. A variety of aspects can be achieved. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to special notification.

In addition, the said structure can also be paraphrased as follows.
“The special notification execution means includes an execution mode setting unit that sets an execution mode of the special notification based on a result of the grant determination when the predetermined special information is a target of the grant determination. The special notification is executed based on the execution mode set by the execution mode setting means,
The setting means can change the execution mode set by the execution mode setting unit after the special notification is started. "

  Feature C3. The setting unit is configured to execute the special notification based on the special information that is the target of the grant determination before the predetermined special information among the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit. The gaming machine according to Feature C1 or Feature C2, comprising means capable of being set (a function of executing the processing of Step S2802 and Step S2803 by the effect control device 82).

  According to the said structure, an execution aspect is set based on the special information used as the object of grant determination before predetermined | prescribed special information. The special information that is subject to the grant determination prior to the predetermined special information is the special information that is subject to the grant determination after the start of the special notification, and is based on the special information relating to the game times executed during the special notification. Thus, the execution mode of the special notification is set. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to suitably raise the degree of attention to not only the special notification but also the game times during execution of this special notification.

Feature C4. The grant determination means performs the grant determination for one special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the grant determination for other special information acquired by the information acquisition means prior to the one special information. Provided with a destination determination means (a function for executing data setting processing by the main controller 81 in the seventh embodiment) that is performed prior to the determination,
The setting means is capable of setting the execution mode of the special notification based on special information for which the assignment determination is performed before the predetermined special information by the destination determination means. A gaming machine according to C3.

  According to the above configuration, since the number of special information that is a target for determination of grant during execution of the special notification increases, the opportunities and targets for setting by the setting unit also increase. This makes it possible to diversify the execution mode of special notification.

  Further, when this configuration is applied to the feature C3, setting by the setting unit can be performed based on the special information acquired after the start of the special notification and before the setting by the setting unit. Therefore, it is meaningful to acquire special information even after the start of special notification, and it is possible to promote the continuation of game ball launch.

  Feature C5. Storage information notification means (effects) for executing the storage notification corresponding to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means (notification by the holding image P) by the predetermined notification means or a separate notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, further comprising a function of executing a hold display setting process by the control device 82).

  According to the above configuration, the storage information notification unit performs the storage notification for the special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and that can trigger the setting of the execution mode of the special notification by the setting unit. For this reason, for example, a special game that is predicted based on the result of the addition of a game that predicts whether or not to set the execution mode of the special notification from the stored notification by the stored information notification means is performed. It is possible to increase the degree of attention not only for notification but also for other stored special information.

  In addition, when it is set as "the said memory alerting | reporting by the said memory | storage information alerting | reporting means is performed based on the specific result by the said previous result specific | specification means", it grasps | ascertains the specific result by a previous result specific | specification means by performing memory alerting | reporting Therefore, the significance of predicting the execution mode of the special notification from the stored notification can be clarified.

Feature C6. The stored information notification means is means for setting notification mode information corresponding to the special information of interest from a plurality of notification mode information (function of selecting the hold image P in the hold display setting process by the effect control device 82). And the storage notification is executed using the notification mode information set by the setting means.
The special notification execution means executes the special notification using the notification mode information,
The setting means is based on the notification mode information about the special information that is the target of the grant determination at a timing earlier than the predetermined special information that is the target of the special notification. The game machine according to Feature C5, wherein the notification mode information about the predetermined special information is set to different notification mode information.

  According to the above configuration, in a situation where a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit, the notification mode information is notified, and when one of the notification mode information is a target of special notification, Based on the notification mode information corresponding to the special information that is the subject of the grant determination prior to the notification mode information that is the target of the special notification, the notification mode information that is the target of the special notification is different from that. The notification mode information can be set. By doing in this way, in the situation where a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, each special information is not simply stored as waiting for the order of grant determination, but the order and special information (notification) The type of aspect information) is related to the special notification, and it is possible to give interest to each special information.

  Feature C7. The setting unit is a selection unit that allows selection of special information that triggers setting of the execution mode of the special notification from the special information different from the predetermined special information (operation-related subtraction by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the gaming machine has a function of executing a process.

  According to the above configuration, when a plurality of special information different from the predetermined special information exists, the selection unit selects which special information is to be used to set the execution mode of the special notification. By doing in this way, a setup can be made more sophisticated than the structure which sets the execution mode of special information simply based on special information different from predetermined special information. That is, for example, when the special notification is set to be more preferable for the player than the special information, the special information is selected by the selection means. For example, if there is only special information that can be set that is not desirable for the player, for example, the player may enter the game ball into the entrance so that other special information is stored. Can be considered. Therefore, it is possible to more appropriately increase the degree of attention to special notification.

Feature C8. An operation means (operation unit 75) for operation by a player is provided,
The gaming machine according to C7, wherein the selection unit is capable of selecting special information that triggers the setting of the execution mode of the special notification based on an operation of the operation unit.

  According to the above configuration, the player's will can be reflected in the setting of the execution mode of the special notification. This makes it possible for the player to be involved in the effect, rather than the unilateral effect from the gaming machine side, and to be more immersed in the game.

  Feature C9. Any of the features C1 to C8, wherein the setting means is capable of setting an execution mode of the special notification based on the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the above configuration, it is clearer that the configuration is such that not only the special information different from the predetermined special information that triggers the special notification, but also the specific notification execution mode is set including the predetermined special information. Become.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Launching means for launching a game ball into the game area (game ball launching mechanism 53);
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball-entry unit (means for executing a winning process for the operation port by the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number that is a plurality of predetermined numbers (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81);
For the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, a grant determining means (main control device 81) for sequentially determining whether to give a player a privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode). A function to execute the pass / fail determination process by
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result corresponding to granting the privilege to the player, the privilege granting unit (by the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player A function for executing the game state transition process), and
Based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) starts a game turn operation, and the game times are notified as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. The game operation is terminated once, and the predetermined notification means is controlled so that the game operation is performed (the function of executing the game operation control process by the main controller 81). )When,
With
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The predetermined notification means is controlled so that the game-returning operation is performed over an operation period,
Information on the operation period set by the operation period setting means when the predetermined special information is the target of the game times by the game time control means for the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means. A pre-operation period specifying means for specifying the predetermined special information at a timing earlier than the target of the game round (a function for performing an effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82);
Execution of special notification (special hold notice) that is started at a timing earlier than the predetermined special information becomes the target of the game times can be executed by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means. Means (function to execute special hold notice setting processing in the production control device 82);
With
The special notification executing means is an execution period setting means for setting the execution period of the special notification based on the operation period specified by the previous operation period specifying means (timer input at the time specifying pattern in the effect control device 82) A game machine having a function of executing a process) and executing the special notification based on the execution period set by the execution period setting means.

  According to the above configuration, the special notification in which the execution period is set based on the operation period specified by the previous operation period specifying unit is performed by the game times related to the special information specified by the previous operation period specifying unit. It may start at a timing earlier than That is, there is a possibility that the production of the operation period corresponding to one special information is performed at different start timings for the game times and the special notification. In this way, if a plurality of production start timings for one piece of special information are provided, for example, if there is an inconvenience in performing the production for that special information, the inconvenience can be avoided by changing the start timing. be able to. As an inconvenience, for example, in a situation where a plurality of special information is acquired and special information is easily acquired, it is necessary to smoothly perform the production corresponding to each special information. If the number of times is increased, the digestion will not be able to catch up with the acquisition of special information, or conversely, if the number of special information stored is small, the game time will be prolonged to prevent interruption. Then, it is mentioned that a player misunderstands that the probability of granting a privilege is high. In this case, for example, there may be a configuration in which only the result of the grant determination is notified after the start timing is different, but only the convenience of the production is prioritized, and the production of one special information is sufficiently provided. It is not preferable to deviate from the enjoyment inherent in gaming machines. In that respect, in the above configuration, even if the start timing is varied, the operation period corresponds, so that it can be said that the special information is sufficiently produced. This makes it possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game while avoiding inconveniences in performance.

Feature D2. In the operation period set by the operation period setting means, a first operation period (holding number correspondence pattern) that reflects a gaming situation (for example, the number of holdings) when the granting determination by the granting determination unit is performed, The second operation period (holding number non-correspondence pattern) that is not so, is included,
The prior operation period specifying means specifies a provisional operation means (fourth implementation) for specifying the temporary operation period when the operation period for the special information to be specified is the first operation period. The game machine according to feature D1, further comprising a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82 in the form.

  Even if the operation period may be different based on the difference in the gaming situation as in the above configuration, if the temporary operation period is specified, the special notification is started at least before the game times for the special information. be able to. In this way, even if it is difficult to specify the operation period in advance, it is possible to increase the opportunity for executing the special notification by leaving a room for executing the special notification.

  Feature D3. The special notification execution means includes a correction means (function to execute the processing of steps S3310 to S3313 by the effect control device 82) that can correct the execution period of the special notification after the special notification is started. The gaming machine according to the feature D1 or the feature D2.

  According to the above configuration, when an inconvenience occurs in the execution period on the special notification side, for example, when the specified operation period is different from the actual operation period, the period can be corrected. It can be avoided.

  Note that “correction” can be rephrased as “shortening or extending the execution period”.

Feature D4. The previous action period specifying means includes means for specifying information related to the action period for special information other than the predetermined special information (function to execute the processing of steps S1701 to S1703 by the effect control device 82),
The special notification execution means includes means for providing the execution period of the special notification including information related to the operation period specified by the means for specifying information related to the operation period for the special information other than the predetermined special information. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, further comprising a function of executing the processing of step S1704 by the control device 82).

  According to the above configuration, the execution period of the special notification by the special notification execution unit can be set as a period including the operation period for the special information other than the predetermined special information specified by the previous operation period specifying unit. it can. In other words, in a configuration in which the special notification is started before the game times for the predetermined special information, the game for other special information performed from the start of the special notification to the start of the game time for the predetermined special information. The special notification can be continued during the operation. In other words, even if special information is included in addition to the predetermined special information, the special notification can be continued until the game times for the predetermined special information. By doing in this way, it is possible to make the player clearly understand the relationship between the special notification and the game times, and further suppress the special notification from ending before the game times and diminishing interest. it can.

Feature D5. In the gaming state, a special gaming state in which the operation period can be specified by the previous operation period specifying means for any special information is set.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein the special notification execution unit is capable of executing the special notification during the special gaming state.

  According to the above configuration, as long as any special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the information of the operation period can be specified in advance, and in such a state, the operation period can be specified. There is no inconvenience that information cannot be specified. As a result, it is possible to suitably realize the effect of specifying the operation period ahead.

Feature D6. The special notification by the special notification execution means is executed so as to end at a predetermined timing during the game round for the predetermined special information,
Based on the information specified by the previous operation period specifying means, there is provided means for adjusting the start timing of the special notification (function for executing the process of step S1710 by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of D1 to D5.

  According to the above configuration, by adjusting the start timing, it is possible to perform special notification according to the previously specified operation period without the need to modify the operation period or change the end timing. Thereby, the special alerting | reporting which alert | reports the length of the operation period of a game time is suitably realizable.

Feature D7. The special notification by the special notification execution means is executed so as to end at a predetermined timing during the game times for the predetermined special information,
The game time control means adjusts the game turn operation at the predetermined timing during the game time for the predetermined special information in response to the special notification (in step S2503 by the effect control device 82). A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function of executing processing.

  According to the above-described configuration, it is possible to associate the effect at the end of the special notification with the game turning operation by adjusting the game turning operation at the end timing without correcting the previously specified operation period. . Thereby, it is possible to accurately notify the length of the operation period of the game times while associating it with the operation for game times.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Launching means for launching a game ball into the game area (game ball launching mechanism 53);
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball-entry unit (means for executing a winning process for the operation port by the main control device 81);
Based on the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, a grant determination means (main control device) that performs grant determination as to whether or not to grant the player a first privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode) 81 for determining whether or not the game is correct)
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result corresponding to granting the first privilege to the player, the first privilege granting unit for granting the first privilege to the player (Function for executing game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
Based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) starts a game turn operation, and the game times are notified as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. The game operation is terminated once, and the predetermined notification means is controlled so that the game operation is performed (the function of executing the game operation control process by the main controller 81). )When,
With
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The predetermined notification means is controlled so that the game-returning operation is performed over an operation period,
Special notification executing means (a function for executing special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) for executing special notification by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on establishment of a predetermined condition. Prepared,
The special notification executing means includes
Period presentation means for presenting a predetermined set period (a function of executing various timer input processes by the effect control device 82);
Based on the fact that one or more of the game-returning operations have continued for the predetermined set period or longer, second privilege granting means (by the effect control device 82) that grants a second privilege different from the first privilege to the player A function to execute a hold display process), and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  Special information is acquired on the basis of the game ball entering the ball entering part provided in the game area, and whether or not the first privilege is granted is determined based on the special information. In a gaming machine in which a game-playing effect (game-turning operation) is executed by predetermined notification means based on the grant determination, if the game-playing effect is flashy for a long time, the corresponding game times Although the degree of attention is increased, the period of time until the first privilege is granted becomes longer, which may make the player feel annoying. Therefore, as in the above configuration, when one or a plurality of game turning operations have continued for a predetermined set period or longer, the second benefit that is different from the first privilege is given, so that the effect for game times is achieved. It is possible to avoid inconvenience due to the longer operation period. In particular, since the predetermined set period is presented by the predetermined notifying means or another notifying means, it is possible for the player to clearly understand the relationship between the operation period of the game times and the predetermined set period. It can be enjoyed in association with the provision of the second privilege and the provision of the first privilege based on the effect of the game times. As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

  Feature E2. The special notification executing unit is configured to execute the special notification when the operation period set by the operation period setting unit is equal to or longer than a predetermined period. Game machines.

  According to the above configuration, when the operation period of the game times is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, a predetermined set period is presented, and if the game turn operation continues for the set period or longer, the second privilege Is granted. By doing in this way, even when the operation period of the game times is short, the special notification is made and the second privilege is hardly given to the player, and the operation period of the game times is long. This inconvenience can be efficiently avoided.

Feature E3. The acquisition information storage means (function to execute processing of Step S205 by main controller 81) which stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number which is a predetermined number is provided. ,
The grant determination means sequentially performs the grant determination on the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means,
Information on the operation period set by the operation period setting means when the predetermined special information is the target of the game times by the game time control means for the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means. Including a pre-operation period specifying means for specifying the predetermined special information at a timing earlier than the target of the game round (a function for executing an effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82),
The special notification execution means executes the special notification when the operation period for the predetermined special information specified by the previous operation period specifying means is equal to or longer than a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to Feature E1 or Feature E2, characterized by:

  According to the above configuration, when the operation period of the game times for the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, a predetermined setting period is presented, If the operation for one or more game times continues for the set period or longer, the second privilege is granted. By doing in this way, the operation for game times of the game times before the start can also be targeted for special notification, and an increase in the opportunity for executing special notification can be expected.

Feature E4. Summing means (for example, by the effect control device 82) sums the motion period for one of the predetermined special information specified by the previous motion period specifying means and the motion period for the other predetermined special information. A function of executing the process of step S1704),
The gaming machine according to feature E3, wherein the special notification execution unit is configured to execute the special notification when a period added by the adding unit is equal to or longer than the predetermined period.

  According to the above configuration, the special notification can be performed based on the operation periods for a plurality of game times before the start. As a result, the sum of the operation periods tends to be equal to or longer than the predetermined period, and an increase in the opportunity for executing special notification can be expected.

Feature E5. In the game times being executed by the game time control means, the remaining time period grasping means for grasping the remaining operation period (function to execute the process of step S1708 by the effect control device 82),
The game according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the special notification execution unit executes the special notification in consideration of the remaining operation period grasped by the remaining period grasping unit. Machine.

  According to the above configuration, since the remaining operation period of the game game being executed is also taken into account, the game game operation being executed can be added as one or more game game operations that are targeted in the special notification. . By doing in this way, the probability that it will become more than a predetermined setting period will also become high, and the start of a special alert | report is not limited only at the time of the start of a game round, but an execution timing can be diversified.

  Note that “applying the remaining operation period” is applied to a configuration in which special notification is performed according to the length of the operation period as in the feature E2, and a configuration in which special notification is performed when the remaining operation period is long. It is good. By doing in this way, when the remaining operation | movement period of a game time is short, it can prevent causing the problem that it becomes difficult to give a 2nd privilege by performing special alerting | reporting.

  Further, when “applying the remaining operation period” is applied to a configuration in which the operation period is specified in advance as in the feature E3, the configuration in which the previously specified operation period and the remaining operation period are added together. It is good. In this way, it is possible to raise an interest in whether or not the game times being executed are longer than a predetermined set period.

  Feature E6. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the special notification execution unit executes the special notification based on a result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit.

  According to the said structure, the result of determination of grant and execution of special alerting | reporting can be linked | related. Thereby, if special notification is performed, a situation where the first privilege is easily / not easily granted can be created, and the player can be entertained together with the game turning operation.

Feature E7. For the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information corresponding to the result of the determination of grant when the predetermined special information becomes the target of the determination of grant, the predetermined special information of the grant determination Provided with a destination specifying means (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding by the main control device 81) for specifying at a timing earlier than the target,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the special notification execution unit is configured to execute the special notification based on a specification result by the destination specifying unit.

  According to the said structure, the information about the special information before grant determination and execution of special alerting | reporting can be linked | related. Thereby, if a special notification is performed, it is possible to create a situation in which the first privilege is likely to be given / difficult to be given based on the special information to be determined thereafter, and the result of the grant determination is predicted from the special notification. You can entertain the game.

  In particular, when this configuration is applied to the configuration of the feature E3, it is possible to perform special notification by associating information on the result of the grant determination with respect to the special information before the grant determination and the information on the operation period, thereby improving attention. More preferable.

Feature E8. The acquisition information storage means (function to execute processing of Step S205 by main controller 81) which stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number which is a predetermined number is provided. ,
The grant determination means sequentially performs the grant determination on the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means,
Information on the operation period set by the operation period setting means when the predetermined special information is the target of the game times by the game time control means for the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means. Including a pre-operation period specifying means for specifying the predetermined special information at a timing earlier than the target of the game round (a function for executing an effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82),
The period presentation unit presents a predetermined set period based on the information on the operation period specified by the previous operation period specification unit, according to any one of the features E1 to E7, Game machines.

  According to the above configuration, since the predetermined set period is presented based on the information of the specified operation period, it is grasped in advance whether or not one or a plurality of game-use movements will continue for a predetermined set period or more. However, special notification can be performed. Thereby, since whether or not the second privilege should be granted can be managed in advance on the gaming machine side, an effect matching that, for example, an effect suggesting that the second privilege is likely to be given or difficult to be given is performed. Is possible.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Launching means for launching a game ball into the game area (game ball launching mechanism 53);
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball-entry unit (means for executing a winning process for the operation port by the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number that is a plurality of predetermined numbers (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81);
For the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, a grant determining means (main control device 81) for sequentially determining whether to give a player a privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode). A function to execute the pass / fail determination process by
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result corresponding to granting the privilege to the player, the privilege granting unit (by the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player A function for executing the game state transition process), and
Based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) starts a game turn operation, and the game times are notified as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. The game operation is terminated once, and the predetermined notification means is controlled so that the game operation is performed (the function of executing the game operation control process by the main controller 81). )When,
Destination specifying means (for holding by the main control device 81) for specifying information on the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing earlier than the predetermined special information is subject to the determination of grant. Function to execute the confirmation process), and
Corresponding to the result of the grant determination in the case where the predetermined special information that is the specific target is the target of the grant determination based on the fact that the specific result by the destination specifying means is a predetermined result Special notification executing means (function for executing a hold control command corresponding process by the effect control device 82) for executing the special notification by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means;
Based on the special notification being performed by the special notification execution means, a predetermined effect is executed in the game times related to the special information different from the predetermined special information triggered by the execution of the special notification. Predetermined effect execution means (function to execute special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the said structure, special alerting | reporting may be performed before it becomes the object of grant determination about the predetermined | prescribed special information memorize | stored in the acquisition information storage means. As a result, it is possible to perform a game in which the predetermined special information targeted for identification by the prior identification means is predicted before the game times corresponding to the predetermined special information, thereby diversifying the game. It is done. Therefore, the attention degree of the game can be increased. Here, in a gaming machine in which such special notification is performed, as the special notification is flashy and the degree of attention about the predetermined special information is increased, the degree of attention to the game times about the other special information is decreased. There is a possibility that. For this reason, the game times played are simply digest games, and it is difficult to sufficiently enjoy the game during that period. Therefore, if the predetermined presentation is performed at the game times for the other special information, if attention is given to the predetermined effects, the degree of attention during the game times for the other special information is suitably set. Can be increased.

  In addition, if it is set as the structure which performs a predetermined production "based on the special information different from the predetermined special information that triggered the execution of the special notification", not only the execution timing of the predetermined production but also the production of the production The contents can also be related to the different special information, and the interest in the different special information can be preferably increased.

  Feature F2. The predetermined effect executing means is configured to execute the predetermined effect in the game times related to the special information that is the subject of the grant determination prior to the predetermined special information. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above configuration, when the special notification is performed, the game times up to the game times for the predetermined special information that is the target of the special notification are easily digested games. By performing the predetermined effect, it is possible to make the player interested in the game even during the execution of the game times where the degree of attention is likely to decrease as a digest game.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Launching means for launching a game ball into the game area (game ball launching mechanism 53);
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball-entry unit (means for executing a winning process for the operation port by the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number that is a plurality of predetermined numbers (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81);
Grant determination means (main control) for sequentially determining whether to give the player a first privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode) for the special information stored in the acquired information storage means A function of executing the determination processing by the device 81),
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result corresponding to granting the first privilege to the player, the first privilege granting unit for granting the first privilege to the player (Function for executing game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
Based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) starts a game turn operation, and the game times are notified as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. The game operation is terminated once, and the predetermined notification means is controlled so that the game operation is performed (the function of executing the game operation control process by the main controller 81). )When,
With
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (a function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation in each game time. The predetermined notification means is controlled so that the game turning operation is performed over the operation period set by the setting means;
A pre-operation period in which the information on the operation period set by the operation period setting unit is specified at a timing earlier than the game time to be set by the operation period setting unit is executed by the game time control unit. Specifying means (function for executing the effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82);
Second privilege granting means (production control device) capable of giving a player a second benefit different from the first privilege based on the result of the specification by the prior action period specifying means being a predetermined result. 82 to execute the special hold notice setting process by 82),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the said structure, the 2nd privilege different from a 1st privilege may be provided based on the operation | movement period of game times having a predetermined result. Therefore, it is possible to raise interest about the operation period. In this case, since the information on the operation period is specified prior to the execution of the game times, the second privilege can also be granted prior to the execution of the game times. By doing so, the player can compare the operation period of the game times with a configuration in which the final length can be grasped only at the end of the game times as a period during which the game turn operation is performed. It becomes possible to grasp this in advance, and since the second privilege is also given according to the length, it becomes possible to make the operation period more interested.

Feature G2. A plurality of execution modes including at least a short-term mode in which the operation period is a short period and a long-term mode in which the operation period is longer than the short-term mode are set in the operation for game times. The game replay operation is performed in the set execution mode,
In the second privilege granting unit, the operation period specified by the previous operation period specifying unit is the operation period in the long-term mode rather than the operation period in the short-term mode. 2. The gaming machine according to Feature G1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to easily grant a privilege.

  According to the said structure, a privilege is easier to be provided when it is specified that it is a long operation period than when a short operation period is specified. By doing so, the player desires a long operation period, and it is possible to reduce the feeling of prolonged play by increasing the operation period.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. Launching means for launching a game ball into the game area (game ball launching mechanism 53);
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball-entry unit (means for executing a winning process for the operation port by the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number that is a plurality of predetermined numbers (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81);
For the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, a grant determining means (main control device 81) for sequentially determining whether to give a player a privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode). A function to execute the pass / fail determination process by
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result corresponding to granting the privilege to the player, the privilege granting unit (by the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player A function for executing the game state transition process), and
Based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination unit, the game notification operation is started by a predetermined notification unit, and the game rotation operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination of grant. A game time control means (a function for executing a game time control process by the main control device 81) for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the game play operation is performed.
Destination specifying means (for holding by the main control device 81) for specifying information on the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing earlier than the predetermined special information is subject to the determination of grant. Function to execute the confirmation process), and
Corresponding to the result of the grant determination in the case where the predetermined special information that is the specific target is the target of the grant determination based on the fact that the specific result by the destination specifying means is a predetermined result Special notification executing means (function for executing a hold control command corresponding process by the effect control device 82) for executing the special notification by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means;
Executable state setting means (special hold notice by the effect control device 82) that sets an executable state in which the specification by the destination specifying means can be executed based on the result of specification by the destination specifying means being a predetermined result. Function to execute the setting process),
With
The game machine characterized in that the executable state can be continued even after the predetermined special information that triggered the setting has been subject to the grant determination.

  According to the said structure, special alerting | reporting may be performed before it becomes the object of grant determination about the predetermined | prescribed special information memorize | stored in the acquisition information storage means. As a result, it is possible to perform a game in which the predetermined special information targeted for identification by the prior identification means is predicted before the game times corresponding to the predetermined special information, thereby diversifying the game. It is done. Therefore, the attention degree of the game can be increased. And after the predetermined special information that triggers the setting is set in the executable state in which the target specification by the target specification unit can be executed based on the specification result of the target specification unit, the determination is made Even so, its ready state can be carried over. That is, it is set to an executable state based on the identification result by the prior identification means, and the special notification based on other special information can be performed after digestion of the special information that triggered the setting. Therefore, diversification of special notification is achieved, and the degree of attention to the game can be preferably increased.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. Information acquisition means (operation by the main control device 81) for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, a game ball entering the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34) Means for performing a winning process for oral use)
Based on the information for grant determination acquired by the information acquisition means, grant determination means (mainly) for determining whether to give a player a first privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode) A function of executing the determination processing by the control device 81),
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first effect setting means for setting a first effect to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) (function of executing a game time control process by the main control device 81). )When,
First effect execution means (function for executing variable display control processing by the effect control device 82) for executing the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first privilege granting means (function to execute a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition set in advance is satisfied (for example, the special hold notice table corresponds to the execution of the special hold notice), the predetermined notice means or a different notice means A second effect execution means capable of executing two effects (special hold notice) (a function for executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82);
Condition setting means (a function for executing special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) for setting a special condition having a different establishment probability according to the length of the period during which the second effect is performed;
Determining means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied (function for executing timer management processing by the effect control device 82);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the grant determination information is acquired based on the acquisition condition being satisfied, and the grant determination is performed based on the grant determination information to determine whether or not the first privilege is granted. In a gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the determination, the second notification is performed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established. Production is performed. Therefore, in addition to the first effect performed based on the determination of grant, the second effect is performed, thereby diversifying the effects.

  Here, the first privilege is granted according to the result of the grant determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a first effect (for example, an effect for game times) is performed by a predetermined notification unit based on the grant determination. On the other hand, if the first effect based on this grant determination continues for a long time, it can be expected that the first privilege may be obtained. On the other hand, for example, whether or not the first privilege is obtained. For a player who is only paying attention, or a player who knows the result of the determination of grant to some extent for some reason (for example, presence / absence or strength of a notice effect), the first effect performed by a predetermined notification means is performed. If it continues for a long time, it may feel redundant. On the other hand, if the first effect based on the grant determination is short, the inconvenience as described above can be avoided, but the effect of sufficiently enjoying the first effect is reduced. That is, the longer the length of the first effect on the assignment determination side is, the better, and it can be said that inconvenience may occur even if the length is short.

  Therefore, as in this configuration, if a special condition having a different establishment probability is set according to the length of the period during which the second effect is performed, and determination means for determining success or failure of the special condition is provided, the grant determination side Even if it is possible to have a scale different from the simple scale such as the length of the first performance and the above-mentioned inconvenience may occur in the first performance on the grant determination side, the special condition is It can be expected that it will be established easily, and it will be possible to maintain a good balance of attention to the game.

  Feature I2. The determination means includes means for determining success or failure of the special condition (function of executing a hold display process by the effect control device 82) regardless of the result of the determination by the determination unit at the time of determination. The gaming machine according to Feature I1, characterized by the above.

  According to the above configuration, the relevance between the success or failure of the special condition in the second effect and the first effect in which the result of the grant determination is reflected can be reduced. In this way, it is possible to purely entertain whether or not the special condition is satisfied in the second effect. For example, an effect in which the first privilege is not easily provided in the first effect on the grant determination side is performed. Even if it is, since the success or failure of the special condition is determined regardless of it, it is possible to suppress the degree of attention from being extremely reduced.

The above configuration is, for example,
"The determination means includes means for performing the determination regardless of conditions other than the special condition at the time of determination",
“The special condition is a probability that is different based on the passage of a predetermined period in the second performance,
The determination means includes means for determining the elapse of the predetermined period regardless of the result of the grant determination.
In other words.

  Feature I3. Based on the determination that the special condition is satisfied by the determination means, second privilege granting means for giving the player a second privilege different from the first privilege (processing for holding display by the effect control device 82) The gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2, further comprising:

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to raise a high interest in whether or not the special condition is satisfied, that is, the determination result of the determination unit. In particular, by making the second privilege different from the first privilege, it is possible to realize a game different from the conventional game such as simply obtaining the first privilege by establishing the acquisition condition. Can be achieved.

  Further, if this configuration is applied to the feature I2, it is possible to enhance the impression that is a separate determination.

  Feature I4. In any one of the characteristics I1 to I3, the condition setting means sets the special condition so that the special condition is more easily established as the period during which the second effect is performed is longer. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, the longer the period during which the second effect is performed, the more easily the special condition is established. By doing so, the player expects the second performance to be performed for a long time.

  As described in the feature I1, the effect on the assignment determination side does not increase the degree of attention as it is longer, and has the possibility of making it feel redundant. Therefore, with this configuration, even if there is a possibility that the first presentation on the determination side is redundant, it is expected that a special condition will be established on the second presentation side. And maintain a good balance of attention to the game.

  Feature I5. The condition setting means includes means for setting the special condition in accordance with the length of the first effect set by the first effect setting means (function for executing the process of step S1501 in the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to associate the length of the first effect on the determination side with the ease of establishment of the special condition on the second effect side. By doing so, even if inconvenience occurs due to the length of the first performance based on the determination of grant, the second effect side absorbs the inconvenience and the degree of attention to the game is extreme. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

  If this configuration is applied to the feature I2, it is related to the first effect on the grant determination side when the special condition is set, and the determination is performed regardless of the result of the grant determination when the special condition is determined. By doing in this way, it can be set as the novel game that the result of determination can be changed by the change of the game situation from the setting of special conditions to determination. The change in the gaming situation may be, for example, a change in the number of stored determination information, in a configuration capable of storing a plurality of determination information.

  Feature I6. Feature I1 is provided with condition notifying means (function for executing special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) for notifying the special condition by the predetermined notifying means or different notifying means. Thru | or the game machine of any one of I5.

  According to the above configuration, the player can be made aware of the special conditions. Thereby, it can fully be enjoyed that the establishment probability of the special condition differs according to the period during which the second performance is performed.

  Feature I7. The condition notifying means includes a prior notifying means (a function for executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) for notifying the special condition at a timing earlier than the determination by the determining means. The gaming machine according to Feature I6, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the special condition at a timing earlier than the determination of success or failure. Since the special conditions have different probability of establishment depending on the length of the period during which the second performance is performed, if the special conditions are grasped at the earliest possible timing, it will be fun to see if the special conditions are met. I can do it.

  Feature I8. The destination notification means includes means for performing notification of the special condition based on the start of the second effect (a function for executing special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to Feature I7.

  According to the above configuration, since the special condition is notified based on the start of the second effect, it is possible to entertain the success or failure for the period related to the success or failure of the special condition.

  Feature I9. The destination notifying means includes means for executing notification of the special condition (function of executing special hold notice control processing by the effect control device 82) while the second effect is being performed. The gaming machine according to Feature I7 or Feature I8.

  According to the above configuration, since the special condition is notified while the second effect is being performed, the player can be made aware that the probability of establishment of the special condition is different. Thereby, a player can be made to grasp | ascertain clearly the relationship between the period when a 2nd effect is performed, and the establishment probability of special conditions.

  Feature I10. The condition notifying means includes post-notification means (function of executing the process of step S2701 by the effect control device 82) for notifying the special condition at a timing after the determination by the determining means is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features I6 to I9, characterized by:

  According to the said structure, it can grasp | ascertain even after the determination by a determination means about special conditions. That is, the success or failure of the special condition can be grasped even after the determination timing. By doing in this way, it is possible to leave interest about whether or not the special condition is satisfied as a remnant even after the timing of giving it, and to prevent the degree of attention from being extremely lowered after the determination. it can.

  Feature I11. The gaming machine according to claim I10, wherein the post-notification means performs notification regarding the probability of establishment of the special condition at the time of determination by the determination means as notification of the special condition.

  According to the above configuration, since the notification regarding the probability of establishment of the special condition at the time of determination is performed, it is possible to grasp not only the success / failure of the special condition but also the degree thereof. Therefore, for example, when the special condition is not satisfied, it is possible to grasp how long the special condition is satisfied later, and it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the degree of attention based on the fact that the special condition is not satisfied. .

Feature I12. Acquisition information storage means for storing the predetermined information, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers, as an upper limit (the function for executing the process of step S205 by the main control device 81). With
The grant determination means sequentially performs the grant determination on the grant determination information stored in the acquisition information storage means,
A destination specifying means (for holding by the main control device 81) for specifying the predetermined grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing earlier than the predetermined grant determination information becomes the target of the grant determination. Function to execute the confirmation process)
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I11, wherein the condition setting means sets the special condition based on a specification result by the destination specifying means.

  According to the above configuration, the special condition is set based on the predetermined grant determination information stored in the acquired information storage unit. Therefore, a game of predicting predetermined grant determination information from the special conditions is added, and the game can be diversified. That is, by associating the special condition with the information for grant determination that triggers the grant determination by the grant determination means, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention regarding the success or failure of the special condition.

Feature I13. The first effect execution means starts the game turning operation by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, and the result of the grant determination As a notification result corresponding to, the game turn operation is terminated as one game time, and the game turn control means (the game control process by the main control device 81 is executed). Function)
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game replay operation is performed over the operation period,
The destination specifying means uses the information on the operation period set by the operation period setting means as a timing before the game times to be set by the operation period setting means are executed by the game time control means. A pre-operation period specifying means (function for executing the effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82),
The condition setting means includes first setting means (a function for executing timer input processing at the time specifying pattern by the effect control device 82) for setting the special condition based on the specifying result of the preceding operation period specifying means. The gaming machine according to Feature I12, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, the special condition is set based on the information on the operation period specified by the previous operation period specifying means. Therefore, the relevance between the special condition and the operation period in game play can be further increased, and the establishment probability of whether or not the special condition is satisfied can be associated with the length of the operation period. Therefore, the effect can be suitably executed.

  Feature I14. The condition setting means includes second setting means (a function for executing timer input processing at the time of a normal pattern by the effect control device 82) for setting the special condition regardless of the specification result by the previous operation period specifying means. The gaming machine according to Feature I13, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, when the operation period cannot be specified first by the previous operation period specifying unit, for example, even when the operation period is determined only at the start of the game round, the special condition is set by the second setting unit. It becomes possible to set. Therefore, the effect can be suitably executed.

Feature I15. In the gaming state, a special state in which the operation period can be specified by the previous operation period specifying means is set for any grant determination information,
The gaming machine according to Feature I13 or Feature I14, wherein the special condition is set during the special state.

  According to the above configuration, during the special state, the information on the operation period can be specified in advance even if any information for determination of grant is stored in the acquired information storage means. If set, there is no inconvenience that information on the operation period cannot be specified. Thereby, it becomes possible to implement | achieve suitably the 2nd production using special conditions.

Feature I16. In the operation period set by the operation period setting means, a first operation period (holding number correspondence pattern) that reflects a gaming situation (for example, the number of holdings) when the granting determination by the granting determination unit is performed, The second operation period (holding number non-correspondence pattern) that is not so, is included,
The previous operation period specifying means includes means for specifying an operation period for the information for determination of addition to be the second operation period (a function for performing an effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features I13 to I15, wherein:

  In a configuration in which a plurality of grant determination information is stored and the grant determination for the grant determination information is sequentially performed, the game situation at the time of acquisition of the grant determination information may be different from the game situation at the grant determination. Even if the operation period is specified at a timing earlier than the determination target, the operation period at the time of specification by the previous operation period specifying means may be different from the operation period at the time of the application determination. Therefore, in the above configuration, the operation based on the difference in the game situation is performed because the second action period is specified at a timing earlier than the target of the determination of grant, not the first action period in which such a game situation is reflected. It is possible to avoid inconvenience related to the prior specification of the period. As a result, it is possible to suitably perform an effect using the operation period.

  Note that if this configuration is applied to the feature I13, “the first setting means is based on the operation period specified by the means for specifying the operation period for the information for determination of application that is the second operation period, It is preferable that the special condition is set.

  Feature I17. The prior operation period specifying means, when the operation period for the provision determination information that is the identification target is the first operation period, sets the provisional operation period as an operation for the provision determination information. The gaming machine according to Feature I16, comprising provisional specifying means for specifying a period (a function for executing special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82 in the fourth embodiment).

  Even if the operation period can be different based on the difference in the gaming situation as in the above configuration, if it is specified as a provisional operation period, it is possible to produce an effect based on the success or failure of the special condition. In other words, even if the operation period cannot be specified in advance, it is possible to suppress the monotonization of the effect by leaving room for the effect.

  If the present configuration is applied to the feature I14, the second setting unit may set the special condition based on the temporary operation period specified by the temporary specifying unit.

Feature I18. The special condition is set so that the probability of establishment becomes higher as the period during which the second performance is performed becomes longer,
The temporary specifying means specifies a period that is not more than the shortest period among the first operation periods that can be set by the operation period setting means as the temporary operation period. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above configuration, since the operation period to be temporarily specified can be patterned in advance, the processing configuration related to temporary specification can be simplified. In addition, since the provisional specific period is equal to or shorter than the shortest period that can be changed thereafter, the probability of establishment of the special condition is set to be higher than the highest probability of establishment. Here, if the probability of establishment of the special condition is extremely low, the player gets used to the fact that the special condition is not established in another production different from the second production in the first place, and the interest in the success or failure of the special condition may be diminished. There is sex. Therefore, by making the special condition easy to be satisfied as in the above configuration, it is possible to avoid a reduction in the degree of attention due to a decrease in the probability of establishment due to provisional specification.

Feature I19. The special condition is set so that the probability of establishment becomes higher as the period during which the second performance is performed becomes longer,
The temporary specifying means specifies a period that is longer than the longest period among the first operation periods that can be set by the operation period setting means as the temporary operation period,
Means (in the fourth embodiment) for correcting the special condition at a timing later than the timing when the provisional identification means is specified and before the determination by the determination means. The gaming machine according to Feature I17 or Feature I18, further comprising a function of executing subtraction processing during shift by the production control device 82).

  According to the above configuration, since the operation period to be temporarily specified can be patterned in advance, the processing configuration related to temporary specification can be simplified. In addition, since the provisional specific period is equal to or longer than the longest period that can change thereafter, the establishment probability of the special condition is set to be equal to or less than the lowest establishment probability. Therefore, in the above-described configuration, the special condition is corrected thereafter, so that a reduction in the degree of attention due to a decrease in the establishment probability due to provisional specification can be avoided.

  The “correction” may be, for example, a configuration of “shortening / extending the period during which the second effect is performed”, and more specifically, regarding the period during which the second effect is performed, A configuration is conceivable in which the difference between the operation period and the operation period set by the operation period setting means is shortened / extended.

Feature I20. Acquisition information storage means for storing the predetermined information, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers, as an upper limit (the function for executing the process of step S205 by the main control device 81). With
The grant determination means sequentially performs grant determination as to whether or not to grant the first privilege to a player based on the grant determination information stored in the acquisition information storage means.
For the predetermined grant determination information stored in the acquired information storage means, the grant determination target at a timing earlier than the predetermined grant determination information becomes the grant determination target by the grant determination means. Provided with a destination specifying means (a function for executing a holding confirmation process by the main control device 81) for specifying information corresponding to the result of the grant determination in the case of
The first effect setting means is a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) based on the specification result by the destination specifying means, wherein the predetermined application determination information is subject to the application determination by the application determination means. To set an effect (holding notice) to be performed at a timing earlier than
The first effect executing means is configured to make the predetermined grant determination information that is the specific target the target of the grant determination based on the fact that the specific result by the destination specifying means is a predetermined result. A special notice (holding notice) corresponding to the result of the grant determination in the case of the predetermined notice at a timing earlier than the result of the grant judgment for the predetermined special information or separate from the predetermined notice means. Which is executed by the notification means,
The second effect executing means, based on the fact that the contents of the special notification executed by the first effect executing means are predetermined contents (for example, contents corresponding to the fourth hold image P4). The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I19, wherein the effect is executed by the predetermined notification means or a separate notification means.

  According to the above configuration, there is a possibility that the special notification is given to the predetermined grant determination information stored in the acquired information storage means before it is subject to grant determination. As a result, it is possible to play a game in which the predetermined grant determination information that has been identified by the first identifying means is predicted before the result of the grant determination of the predetermined grant determination information is notified. As a result, diversification of games is achieved. Therefore, the attention degree of the game can be increased. When performing such special notification, if it is a special notification that makes it easy for the player to be given the first privilege, the degree of attention to the special notification is increased, while the production of the other information for determination of grant is performed. May reduce the degree of attention. Moreover, if it is a special alert | report which makes it difficult to give a 1st privilege, not only the special alert | report but the attention degree to the subsequent production may fall extremely. Therefore, for example, when a predetermined content is set as the special notification, the degree of attention may be reduced by performing the special notification if the second notification is performed by the predetermined notification unit or a different notification unit. In the situation, it is possible to pay attention to the second performance side, and it is possible to suitably avoid a reduction in the degree of attention.

Feature I21. The first effect execution means starts the game turning operation by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, and the result of the grant determination As a notification result corresponding to, the game turn operation is terminated as one game time, and the game turn control means (the game control process by the main control device 81 is executed). Function)
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game replay operation is performed over the operation period,
The destination specifying means uses the information on the operation period set by the operation period setting means as a timing before the game times to be set by the operation period setting means are executed by the game time control means. A pre-operation period specifying means (function for executing the effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82),
The gaming machine according to Feature I20, wherein the condition setting means sets the special condition based on a specification result by the previous operation period specifying means.

  According to the said structure, in the 2nd production performed based on the content of the special alert | report being the predetermined content, the special condition is set based on the information of an operation period. Thereby, the special alerting | reporting performed based on the information for predetermined | prescribed provision determination, and the information of an operation period can be linked | related.

  In this case, the notification regarding the predetermined grant determination information is performed for the special notification, and the special condition in the second effect executed based on the special notification is based on an operation period other than the predetermined grant determination information. May be set, or may be set based on an operation period of predetermined grant determination information. In the former case, it is possible to increase the degree of attention with respect to the other information for determination of assignment by the second effect while increasing the degree of attention with respect to the predetermined information for determination of provision with special notification. In the latter case, the special notification and the second effect can be more closely associated. For example, when the special notification is performed to suggest that the first privilege is difficult to be given, the special effect is used in the second effect. It is possible to diversify the production by, for example, a configuration in which the production is easy to satisfy the condition.

  Feature I22. In the special notification that triggered the execution of the second effect by the second effect execution unit, the condition setting unit is configured to determine the grant determination before the predetermined grant determination information that is a target of the special notification. The gaming machine according to I21, characterized in that the special condition is set based on the operation period specified by the previous operation period specifying means for the grant determination information to be targeted.

  According to the above configuration, since the special condition is set based on the operation period of the grant determination information that is the target of the grant determination before the grant determination information that is the target of the special alert, It is possible to increase the interest in the operation period of the game times for the information for grant determination that is the target of the grant determination before the information for grant determination, and to the effect for other game times by performing a special notification It becomes possible to avoid a reduction in the degree of attention.

Feature I23. The first effect execution means starts the game turning operation by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, and the result of the grant determination As a notification result corresponding to, the game turn operation is terminated as one game time, and the game turn control means (the game control process by the main control device 81 is executed). Function)
The game turn operation by the game turn control means includes the first action (reach occurrence) and the first action before the first action at a timing prior to notifying the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means. The branch timing for branching to the second action (reach non-occurrence) where the grant probability of one privilege is low is set (high-speed fluctuation end timing of the lower symbol sequence Z3),
The determination means determines whether or not the special condition is successful at the branch timing in the game rotation operation for the grant determination information for which the grant determination is performed in a situation where the second effect is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I22, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, the success or failure of the special condition is determined at the branch timing between the first operation and the second operation. Further, at this branch timing, the probability that the first privilege is granted is increased if the gaming operation is branched to the first operation, while the grant probability is lowered if the game is branched to the second operation. In this case, it may be possible to further add a branch effect associated with the level of the grant probability for the first benefit, but if the effect is too complicated, there is a concern that the player's understanding will be reduced. It is possible that interest will fade. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the special condition different from the first privilege is determined at this branch timing, it is possible to suitably execute a plurality of branch effects related to the privilege grant while suppressing the complexity of the game.

  Feature I24. Special setting means capable of making the elapsed speed of the period corresponding to the special condition set by the condition setting means different from the elapsed speed so far or making the remaining period of the period different from the remaining period so far. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I23, wherein the gaming machine includes a function of executing a subtraction value adjustment process by the effect control device 82.

  According to the above configuration, the probability of establishment of the special condition changes as the elapsed speed or the remaining period of the period corresponding to the special condition changes. Thus, for example, even if the special condition is not likely to be satisfied, the special condition can be satisfied by changing the elapsed speed or the remaining period, and for example, the special condition is likely to be satisfied. Even so, it is possible to prevent the special condition from being satisfied by changing the elapsed speed or the remaining period. That is, the success / failure process of the special condition can be varied, and the degree of attention to the second effect can be suitably increased.

Feature I25. The first effect execution means starts the game turning operation by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, and the result of the grant determination As a notification result corresponding to, the game turn operation is terminated as one game time, and the game turn control means (the game control process by the main control device 81 is executed). Function)
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game replay operation is performed over the operation period,
The gaming machine according to claim I24, wherein the special setting means is configured to change the special setting means according to the operation period set by the operation period setting means.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to further increase the relevance of the establishment probability of the special condition with the operation period, and it is possible to suitably avoid inconveniences based on the length of the operation period of game times.

Feature I26. The special condition is set such that the probability of establishment increases as the period during which the second performance is performed elapses,
The gaming machine according to Feature I25, wherein the special setting means is configured to increase the elapsed speed to be varied or shorten the remaining period to be varied as the operation period is shorter.

  According to the above configuration, when the operation period is short, the period during which the predetermined set period elapses is also shortened, so that the probability of establishment of the special condition can be lowered. Therefore, in such a case, by changing the speed so that the elapsed speed is increased or the remaining period is shortened, it is possible to prevent the interest from diminishing by predicting that the special condition is not satisfied due to the short operation period. Is possible.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. Information acquisition means (operation by the main control device 81) for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, a game ball entering the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34) Means for performing a winning process for oral use)
Based on the information for grant determination acquired by the information acquisition means, grant determination means (mainly) for determining whether to give a player a first privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode) A function of executing the determination processing by the control device 81),
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first effect setting means for setting a first effect to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) (function of executing a game time control process by the main control device 81). )When,
First effect execution means (function for executing variable display control processing by the effect control device 82) for executing the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first privilege granting means (function to execute a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition set in advance is satisfied (for example, the special hold notice table corresponds to the execution of the special hold notice), the predetermined notice means or a different notice means A second effect execution means capable of executing two effects (special hold notice) (a function for executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82);
Condition setting means for setting a special condition having a different establishment probability according to the length of the period during which the first effect is performed (a function for executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82);
Determining means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied (function for executing timer management processing by the effect control device 82);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the grant determination information is acquired based on the acquisition condition being satisfied, and the grant determination is performed based on the grant determination information to determine whether or not the first privilege is granted. In a gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the determination, the second notification is performed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established. Production is performed. Therefore, in addition to the first effect performed based on the determination of grant, the second effect is performed, thereby diversifying the effects.

  Here, the first privilege is granted according to the result of the grant determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a first effect (for example, an effect for game times) is performed by a predetermined notification unit based on the grant determination. On the other hand, if the first effect based on this grant determination continues for a long time, it can be expected that the first privilege may be obtained. On the other hand, for example, whether or not the first privilege is obtained. For a player who is only paying attention, or a player who knows the result of the determination of grant to some extent for some reason (for example, presence / absence or strength of a notice effect), the first effect performed by a predetermined notification means is performed. If it continues for a long time, it may feel redundant. On the other hand, if the first effect based on the grant determination is short, the inconvenience as described above can be avoided, but the effect of sufficiently enjoying the first effect is reduced. That is, the longer the length of the first effect on the assignment determination side is, the better, and it can be said that inconvenience may occur even if the length is short.

  Therefore, as in this configuration, if a special condition having a different establishment probability is set according to the length of the period during which the first effect is performed, and a determination unit that determines whether the special condition is successful is provided, the first effect is provided. It is possible to make a determination different from the grant determination for which the first effect is set, and the special condition is satisfied even if the above-mentioned inconvenience may occur in the first effect. It can be expected that it will be easy, and it will be possible to maintain a good balance of attention to the game.

"The first effect executing means starts the game replay operation by the predetermined notifying means or a different notifying means based on the determination of the giving by the giving determining means, As a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, the game turn operation is terminated once as the game turn operation, and the game turn control means (game control by the main controller 81) is performed so that the game turn operation is performed. Function to execute processing)
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. If this feature is applied to a gaming machine, the game replay operation should be performed over a period of operation
“According to the length of the period during which the first performance is performed”
In other words, “based on the length of the operation period set by the operation period setting means”.

Feature J2. Information acquisition means (operation by the main control device 81) for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, a game ball entering the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34) Means for performing a winning process for oral use)
Based on the information for grant determination acquired by the information acquisition means, grant determination means (mainly) for determining whether to give a player a first privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode) A function of executing the determination processing by the control device 81),
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first effect setting means for setting a first effect to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) (function of executing a game time control process by the main control device 81). )When,
First effect execution means (function for executing variable display control processing by the effect control device 82) for executing the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first privilege granting means (function to execute a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition set in advance is satisfied (for example, the special hold notice table corresponds to the execution of the special hold notice), the predetermined notice means or a different notice means A second effect execution means capable of executing two effects (special hold notice) (a function for executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82);
Condition setting means (a function for executing special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) for setting special conditions having different establishment probabilities depending on the relationship between the first effect and the second effect;
Determining means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied (function for executing timer management processing by the effect control device 82);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the grant determination information is acquired based on the acquisition condition being satisfied, and the grant determination is performed based on the grant determination information to determine whether or not the first privilege is granted. In a gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the determination, the second notification is performed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established. Production is performed. Therefore, in addition to the first effect performed based on the determination of grant, the second effect is performed, thereby diversifying the effects.

  Here, the first privilege is granted according to the result of the grant determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a first effect (for example, an effect for game times) is performed by a predetermined notification unit based on the grant determination. In the case of the player, while the degree of attention is increased by the contents of the first effect, for the player who knows the result of the grant determination to some extent due to some circumstances (for example, presence / absence or strength of the notice effect), the first effect is used. It may feel redundant.

  Therefore, as in this configuration, if a special condition having a different establishment probability is set depending on the relationship between the first effect and the second effect, and determination means for determining success or failure of the special condition is provided, a simple determination on the grant determination side. The production can be enjoyed from a viewpoint different from the first production, and even if the above-mentioned inconvenience may occur in the first production on the grant determination side, the special condition is easily established. Then, it can be expected, and it becomes possible to keep the degree of attention to the game in a balanced manner.

  “The probability of establishment differs depending on the relationship between the first effect and the second effect” means “the probability of establishment differs according to the length of each period of the first effect and the second effect” In other words, inconvenience due to the period during which the first effect is performed (inconvenience due to being too long or inconvenience due to being too short) can be eliminated in relation to the second effect.

Feature J3. Information acquisition means (operation by the main control device 81) for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, a game ball entering the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34) Means for performing a winning process for oral use)
Based on the information for grant determination acquired by the information acquisition means, grant determination means (mainly) for determining whether to give a player a first privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode) A function of executing the determination processing by the control device 81),
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first effect setting means for setting a first effect to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) (function of executing a game time control process by the main control device 81). )When,
First effect execution means (function for executing variable display control processing by the effect control device 82) for executing the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first privilege granting means (function to execute a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition set in advance is satisfied (for example, the special hold notice table corresponds to the execution of the special hold notice), the predetermined notice means or a different notice means A second effect execution means capable of executing two effects (special hold notice) (a function for executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82);
Second effect setting means for setting the type of the second effect in accordance with the first effect set by the effect setting means (function for executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the grant determination information is acquired based on the acquisition condition being satisfied, and the grant determination is performed based on the grant determination information to determine whether or not the first privilege is granted. In a gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the determination, the second notification is performed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established. Production is performed. Therefore, in addition to the first effect performed based on the determination of grant, the second effect is performed, thereby diversifying the effects.

  Here, the first privilege is granted according to the result of the grant determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a first effect (for example, an effect for game times) is performed by a predetermined notification unit based on the grant determination. In the case of the player, while the degree of attention is increased by the contents of the first effect, for the player who knows the result of the grant determination to some extent due to some circumstances (for example, presence / absence or strength of the notice effect), the first effect is used. It may feel redundant.

Therefore, as in this configuration, by setting the type of the second effect according to the first effect, the effect can be enjoyed from a viewpoint different from the simple first effect on the determination side, and provisional Even if the above-mentioned inconvenience may occur in the first production on the judgment side, an effect that complements the inconvenience can be performed in the second production, and the degree of attention to the game is maintained in a well-balanced manner. It becomes possible.
<Feature K group>
Feature K1. Information acquisition means (operation by the main control device 81) for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, a game ball entering the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34) Means for performing a winning process for oral use)
Based on the information for grant determination acquired by the information acquisition means, grant determination means (mainly) for determining whether to give a player a first privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode) A function of executing the determination processing by the control device 81),
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first effect setting means for setting a first effect to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) (function of executing a game time control process by the main control device 81). )When,
First effect execution means (function for executing variable display control processing by the effect control device 82) for executing the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first privilege granting means (function to execute a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Second effect execution means (special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) capable of executing a second effect (special hold notice) different from the first effect by the predetermined notifying means or another notifying means. Function to execute)
First condition setting means for setting a special condition whose probability of establishment may differ depending on the length of the period during which the second effect is performed without taking into account that the special condition is satisfied (at the time of the normal pattern by the effect control device 82) Timer input processing)
Determination means (function for executing timer management processing by the effect control device 82) for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied after the setting of the special condition by the first condition setting means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the grant determination information is acquired based on the acquisition condition being satisfied, and the grant determination is performed based on the grant determination information to determine whether or not the first privilege is granted. In a gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the determination, the second notification is performed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established. Production is performed. Therefore, in addition to the first effect performed based on the determination of grant, the second effect is performed, thereby diversifying the effects.

  Here, the first privilege is granted according to the result of the grant determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a first effect (for example, an effect for game times) is performed by a predetermined notification unit based on the grant determination. On the other hand, if the first effect based on this grant determination continues for a long time, it can be expected that the first privilege may be obtained. On the other hand, for example, whether or not the first privilege is obtained. For a player who is only paying attention, or a player who knows the result of the determination of grant to some extent for some reason (for example, presence / absence or strength of a notice effect), the first effect performed by a predetermined notification means is performed. If it continues for a long time, it may feel redundant. On the other hand, if the first effect based on the grant determination is short, the inconvenience as described above can be avoided, but the effect of sufficiently enjoying the first effect is reduced. That is, the longer the length of the first effect on the assignment determination side is, the better, and it can be said that inconvenience may occur even if the length is short.

  Therefore, as in this configuration, a special condition that can vary in the probability of establishment depending on the length of the period during which the second performance is performed is set without considering that the special condition is established, and after the setting, the special condition is set. If the determination means for determining the success or failure of the application is provided, a scale different from the scale of the simple first performance on the determination side can be provided. Even if such inconvenience may occur, it can be expected that the special condition will be easily established.

  In particular, the special condition set by the first condition setting means is set without taking into account that the special condition is satisfied, so that the result can be understood from other information on the way like a so-called race. The event can be avoided. Therefore, it becomes possible to keep the degree of attention to the game in a balanced manner. Note that “depending on the length of the period” can be rephrased as “in relation to the length of the period” or “depending on the length of the period”. Further, “without considering that the special condition is satisfied” can be rephrased as “without considering whether or not the special condition is satisfied”.

  Feature K2. 2nd condition setting means (function which performs timer input processing at the time specific pattern by the production control device 82) for setting the special condition based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied is provided. The gaming machine according to feature K1.

  According to the above configuration, whether or not the special condition is satisfied can be managed to some extent on the gaming machine side, for example, depending on the gaming situation. Specifically, if the special condition is to be established for production or the special condition should not be established, if the special condition is set based on that, the special condition A sense of incongruity in the production based on success or failure can be eliminated, and in this way, the production as designed can be suitably executed.

  In particular, by applying this configuration to the gaming machine of feature K1, the special condition by the first condition setting means is set without considering whether it is satisfied, and the special condition by the second condition setting means is It is set based on whether or not it is established. For this reason, whether or not the special condition is satisfied is not known in the middle like a so-called race, and the special condition is satisfied regardless of the situation where the special condition should be satisfied according to the gaming state. The inconvenience of not performing can be avoided. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature K3. Information acquisition means (operation by the main control device 81) for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, a game ball entering the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34) Means for performing a winning process for oral use)
Based on the information for grant determination acquired by the information acquisition means, grant determination means (mainly) for determining whether to give a player a first privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode) A function of executing the determination processing by the control device 81),
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first effect setting means for setting a first effect to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) (function of executing a game time control process by the main control device 81). )When,
First effect execution means (function for executing variable display control processing by the effect control device 82) for executing the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first privilege granting means (function to execute a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Second effect execution means (special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) capable of executing a second effect (special hold notice) different from the first effect by the predetermined notifying means or another notifying means. Function to execute)
First condition setting means for setting a special condition whose probability of establishment may differ depending on the length of the period during which the second effect is performed without taking into account that the special condition is satisfied (at the time of the normal pattern by the effect control device 82) Timer input processing)
Determination means (function for executing timer management processing by the effect control device 82) for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied after the setting of the special condition by the first condition setting means;
A second condition setting means for setting the special condition based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied (function for executing a timer input process at the time specific pattern by the effect control device 82);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the grant determination information is acquired based on the acquisition condition being satisfied, and the grant determination is performed based on the grant determination information to determine whether or not the first privilege is granted. In a gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the determination, the second notification is performed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established. Production is performed. Therefore, in addition to the first effect performed based on the determination of grant, the second effect is performed, thereby diversifying the effects.

  Here, the first privilege is granted according to the result of the grant determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a first effect (for example, an effect for game times) is performed by a predetermined notification unit based on the grant determination. On the other hand, if the first effect based on this grant determination continues for a long time, it can be expected that the first privilege may be obtained. On the other hand, for example, whether or not the first privilege is obtained. For a player who is only paying attention, or a player who knows the result of the determination of grant to some extent for some reason (for example, presence / absence or strength of a notice effect), the first effect performed by a predetermined notification means is performed. If it continues for a long time, it may feel redundant. On the other hand, if the first effect based on the grant determination is short, the inconvenience as described above can be avoided, but the effect of sufficiently enjoying the first effect is reduced. That is, the longer the length of the first effect on the assignment determination side is, the better, and it can be said that inconvenience may occur even if the length is short.

  Therefore, as in this configuration, a special condition that can vary in the probability of establishment depending on the length of the period during which the second performance is performed is set without considering that the special condition is established, and after the setting, the special condition is set. If the determination means for determining the success or failure of the application is provided, a scale different from the scale of the simple first performance on the determination side can be provided. Even if such inconvenience may occur, it can be expected that the special condition will be easily established.

  In particular, the special condition by the first condition setting means is set without considering whether or not it is satisfied, and the special condition by the second condition setting means is set based on whether or not it is satisfied. For this reason, whether or not the special condition is satisfied is not known in the middle like a so-called race, and the special condition is satisfied regardless of the situation where the special condition should be satisfied according to the gaming state. The inconvenience of not performing can be avoided. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game. Note that “depending on the length of the period” can be rephrased as “in relation to the length of the period” or “depending on the length of the period”. Further, “without considering that the special condition is satisfied” can be rephrased as “without considering whether or not the special condition is satisfied”.

  Feature K4. The second condition setting means grasps the grant determination information or special information set based on the grant determination information (for example, information such as the number of stored memories N, the determination result, the variation display time, etc.) A feature K2 or a feature characterized in that the special condition is set based on the information grasped by the grasping means. A gaming machine according to K3.

  According to the said structure, a 2nd condition setting means sets a special condition based on the information (Special information set based on the information for grant determination or the information for grant determination) by the 1st production side. Therefore, it becomes possible to relate the second effect to the first effect, and it is possible to make the first effect side interested while making the second effect more interesting, and to increase the degree of attention to the game more suitably. It becomes possible.

  Feature K5. The second condition setting means includes means for setting the special condition so that the special condition is satisfied (function to execute timer input processing at the time specific pattern by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to feature K4.

  According to the above configuration, since the special condition may be set so that the special condition in the second effect is established based on the information on the first effect side, for example, the degree of attention is lowered only on the first effect side. If the special condition in the second effect is established in such a situation, the second effect side compensates for the decrease in the attention level on the first effect side. In this way, the degree of attention can be increased in a balanced manner using the first effect and the second effect.

  Feature K6. The determination means includes means for determining success or failure of the special condition (function of executing a hold display process by the effect control device 82) regardless of the result of the determination by the determination unit at the time of determination. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, the relevance between the success or failure of the special condition in the second effect and the first effect in which the result of the grant determination is reflected can be reduced. In this way, it is possible to purely entertain whether or not the special condition is satisfied in the second effect. For example, an effect in which the first privilege is not easily provided in the first effect on the grant determination side is performed. Even if it is, since the success or failure of the special condition is determined regardless of it, it is possible to suppress the degree of attention from being extremely reduced.

The above configuration is, for example,
"The determination means includes means for performing the determination regardless of conditions other than the special condition at the time of determination",
“The special condition is a probability that is different based on the passage of a predetermined period in the second performance,
The determination means includes means for determining the elapse of the predetermined period regardless of the result of the grant determination.
In other words.

  Feature K7. Based on the determination that the special condition is satisfied by the determination means, second privilege granting means for giving the player a second privilege different from the first privilege (processing for holding display by the effect control device 82) The gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K6, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function of

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to raise a high interest in whether or not the special condition is satisfied, that is, the determination result of the determination unit. In particular, by making the second privilege different from the first privilege, it is possible to realize a game different from the conventional game such as simply obtaining the first privilege by establishing the acquisition condition. Can be achieved.

  Moreover, if this configuration is applied to the feature K7, it is possible to enhance the impression that is a separate determination.

  Feature K8. In any one of the characteristics K1 to K7, the condition setting unit sets the special condition so that the special condition is more easily established as the period during which the second effect is performed is longer. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, the longer the period during which the second effect is performed, the more easily the special condition is established. By doing so, the player expects the second performance to be performed for a long time.

  As described in the feature K1, the effect on the assignment determination side does not increase the degree of attention as it is longer, and has the possibility of making it feel redundant. Therefore, with this configuration, even if there is a possibility that the first presentation on the determination side is redundant, it is expected that a special condition will be established on the second presentation side. And maintain a good balance of attention to the game.

  Note that the condition setting means in this configuration can be applied to both the first condition setting means and the second condition setting means, or the above-described effects can be obtained even if only one of them is applied.

Feature K9. The first effect executing means starts the game turning operation by the predetermined notifying means based on the grant determination by the grant determining means, and as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. It is provided with game time control means (function to execute a game time control process by the main control device 81) that causes the game time operation to be performed once to end the game time operation,
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game replay operation is performed over the operation period,
The second condition setting means includes means for setting the special condition based on the length of the operation period set by the operation period setting means (function for executing the process of step S1501 in the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K8, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which a game turn operation in a game time is performed as the first effect, the length of the operation period of the game time can be associated with the ease of establishment of the special condition on the second effect side. It becomes possible. By doing so, even if inconvenience occurs due to the length of the operation period in the game round performed based on the grant determination, the inconvenience is absorbed on the second effect side, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It is possible to suppress an extreme decrease.

  Feature K10. A condition notifying means (function for executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) for notifying the special condition by the predetermined notifying means or a different notifying means is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of thru K9.

  According to the above configuration, the player can be made aware of the special conditions. Thereby, it can fully be enjoyed that the establishment probability of the special condition differs according to the period during which the second performance is performed.

  Feature K11. The condition notification means is a destination notification means for performing notification of the special condition at a timing closer to the start of the second effect than the end of the second effect (function to execute a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82). ). The gaming machine according to Feature K10, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the special condition at a relatively early timing. Since the special conditions have different probability of establishment depending on the length of the period during which the second performance is performed, if the special conditions are grasped at the earliest possible timing, it will be fun to see if the special conditions are met. I can do it.

  Feature K12. The destination notification means includes means for performing notification of the special condition based on the start of the second effect (a function for executing special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82). A gaming machine according to Feature K11.

  According to the above configuration, since the special condition is notified based on the start of the second effect, it is possible to entertain the success or failure for the period related to the success or failure of the special condition.

  Feature K13. The destination notifying means includes means for executing notification of the special condition (function of executing special hold notice control processing by the effect control device 82) while the second effect is being performed. The gaming machine according to feature K11 or feature K12.

  According to the above configuration, since the special condition is notified while the second effect is being performed, the player can be made aware that the probability of establishment of the special condition is different. Thereby, a player can be made to grasp | ascertain clearly the relationship between the period when a 2nd effect is performed, and the establishment probability of special conditions.

  Feature K14. The condition notifying means includes post-notification means (function for executing the process of step S2701 by the effect control device 82) for notifying the special condition at a timing later than the end of the second effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features K10 to K13.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp the special conditions even after the end of the second effect. By doing in this way, it is possible to leave interest about whether or not the special condition is satisfied as a remnant even after the provision timing, and the degree of attention will be extremely lowered after the end of the second effect. Can be suppressed.

  Feature K15. The game machine according to claim K14, wherein the post-notification unit performs notification regarding the probability of establishment of the special condition at the time of determination by the determination unit as notification of the special condition.

  According to the above configuration, since the notification regarding the probability of establishment of the special condition at the time of determination is performed, it is possible to grasp not only the success / failure of the special condition but also the degree thereof. Therefore, for example, when the special condition is not satisfied, it is possible to grasp how long the special condition is satisfied later, and it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the degree of attention based on the fact that the special condition is not satisfied. .

Feature K16. Acquisition information storage means for storing the predetermined information, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers, as an upper limit (the function for executing the process of step S205 by the main control device 81). With
The grant determination means sequentially performs the grant determination on the grant determination information stored in the acquisition information storage means,
A destination specifying means (for holding by the main control device 81) for specifying the predetermined grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing earlier than the predetermined grant determination information becomes the target of the grant determination. Function to execute the confirmation process)
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K15, wherein the second condition setting means sets the special condition based on a specification result by the destination specifying means.

  According to the above configuration, the special condition is set based on the predetermined grant determination information stored in the acquired information storage unit. Therefore, a game of predicting predetermined grant determination information from the special conditions is added, and the game can be diversified. That is, by associating the special condition with the information for grant determination that triggers the grant determination by the grant determination means, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention regarding the success or failure of the special condition.

Feature K17. The first effect executing means starts the game turning operation by the predetermined notifying means based on the grant determination by the grant determining means, and as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. It is provided with game time control means (function to execute a game time control process by the main control device 81) that causes the game time operation to be performed once to end the game time operation,
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game replay operation is performed over the operation period,
The destination specifying means uses the information on the operation period set by the operation period setting means as a timing before the game times to be set by the operation period setting means are executed by the game time control means. A pre-operation period specifying means (function for executing the effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82),
The second condition setting means is a first setting means for setting the special condition based on the specification result of the previous operation period specifying means (function for executing timer input processing at the time specifying pattern by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to Feature K16, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the special condition is set based on the information on the operation period specified by the previous operation period specifying means. Therefore, the relevance between the special condition and the operation period in game play can be further increased, and the establishment probability of whether or not the special condition is satisfied can be associated with the length of the operation period. Therefore, the effect can be suitably executed.

  Feature K18. The second condition setting means includes a second setting means (function for executing timer input processing at the normal pattern by the effect control device 82) for setting the special condition regardless of the specification result by the previous operation period specifying means. A gaming machine according to Feature K17, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the operation period cannot be specified first by the previous operation period specifying unit, for example, even when the operation period is determined only at the start of the game round, the special condition is set by the second setting unit. It becomes possible to set. Therefore, the effect can be suitably executed.

Feature K19. In the gaming state, a special state in which the operation period can be specified by the previous operation period specifying means is set for any grant determination information,
The gaming machine according to Feature K17 or Feature K18, wherein the special condition is set during the special state.

  According to the above configuration, during the special state, the information on the operation period can be specified in advance even if any information for determination of grant is stored in the acquired information storage means. If set, there is no inconvenience that information on the operation period cannot be specified. Thereby, it becomes possible to implement | achieve suitably the 2nd production using special conditions.

Feature K20. In the operation period set by the operation period setting means, a first operation period (holding number correspondence pattern) that reflects a gaming situation (for example, the number of holdings) when the granting determination by the granting determination unit is performed, The second operation period (holding number non-correspondence pattern) that is not so, is included,
The previous operation period specifying means includes means for specifying an operation period for the information for determination of addition to be the second operation period (a function for performing an effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features K17 to K19.

  In a configuration in which a plurality of grant determination information is stored and the grant determination for the grant determination information is sequentially performed, the game situation at the time of acquisition of the grant determination information may be different from the game situation at the grant determination. Even if the operation period is specified at a timing earlier than the determination target, the operation period at the time of specification by the previous operation period specifying means may be different from the operation period at the time of the application determination. Therefore, in the above configuration, the operation based on the difference in the game situation is performed because the second action period is specified at a timing earlier than the target of the determination of grant, not the first action period in which such a game situation is reflected. It is possible to avoid inconvenience related to the prior specification of the period. As a result, it is possible to suitably perform an effect using the operation period.

  Note that if this configuration is applied to the feature K17, “the first setting means is based on the operation period specified by the means for specifying the operation period with respect to the provision determination information that is the second operation period, It is preferable that the special condition is set.

  Feature K21. The prior operation period specifying means, when the operation period for the provision determination information that is the identification target is the first operation period, sets the provisional operation period as an operation for the provision determination information. The gaming machine according to feature K20, comprising provisional specifying means for specifying a period (a function for executing special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82 in the fourth embodiment).

  Even if the operation period can be different based on the difference in the gaming situation as in the above configuration, if it is specified as a provisional operation period, it is possible to produce an effect based on the success or failure of the special condition. In other words, even if the operation period cannot be specified in advance, it is possible to suppress the monotonization of the effect by leaving room for the effect.

  If the present configuration is applied to the feature K18, it is preferable that the second setting unit sets the special condition based on the temporary operation period specified by the temporary specifying unit.

Feature K22. The special condition is set so that the probability of establishment becomes higher as the period during which the second performance is performed becomes longer,
The temporary specifying means specifies a period that is not more than the shortest period among the first operation periods that can be set by the operation period setting means as the temporary operation period. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above configuration, since the operation period to be temporarily specified can be patterned in advance, the processing configuration related to temporary specification can be simplified. In addition, since the provisional specific period is equal to or shorter than the shortest period that can be changed thereafter, the probability of establishment of the special condition is set to be higher than the highest probability of establishment. Here, if the probability of establishment of the special condition is extremely low, the player gets used to the fact that the special condition is not established in another production different from the second production in the first place, and the interest in the success or failure of the special condition may be diminished. There is sex. Therefore, by making the special condition easy to be satisfied as in the above configuration, it is possible to avoid a reduction in the degree of attention due to a decrease in the probability of establishment due to provisional specification.

Feature K23. The special condition is set so that the probability of establishment becomes higher as the period during which the second performance is performed becomes longer,
The temporary specifying means specifies a period that is longer than the longest period among the first operation periods that can be set by the operation period setting means as the temporary operation period,
Means (in the fourth embodiment) for correcting the special condition at a timing later than the timing when the provisional identification means is specified and before the determination by the determination means. The game machine according to Feature K21 or Feature K22, further including a function of performing subtraction processing during shifting by the effect control device 82).

  According to the above configuration, since the operation period to be temporarily specified can be patterned in advance, the processing configuration related to temporary specification can be simplified. In addition, since the provisional specific period is equal to or longer than the longest period that can change thereafter, the establishment probability of the special condition is set to be equal to or less than the lowest establishment probability. Therefore, in the above-described configuration, the special condition is corrected thereafter, so that a reduction in the degree of attention due to a decrease in the establishment probability due to provisional specification can be avoided.

  The “correction” may be, for example, a configuration of “shortening / extending the period during which the second effect is performed”, and more specifically, regarding the period during which the second effect is performed, A configuration is conceivable in which the difference between the operation period and the operation period set by the operation period setting means is shortened / extended.

Feature K24. Acquisition information storage means for storing the predetermined information, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers, as an upper limit (the function for executing the process of step S205 by the main control device 81). With
The grant determination means sequentially performs grant determination as to whether or not to grant the first privilege to a player based on the grant determination information stored in the acquisition information storage means.
For the predetermined grant determination information stored in the acquired information storage means, the grant determination target at a timing earlier than the predetermined grant determination information becomes the grant determination target by the grant determination means. Provided with a destination specifying means (a function for executing a holding confirmation process by the main control device 81) for specifying information corresponding to the result of the grant determination in the case of
The first effect setting means is a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) based on the specification result by the destination specifying means, wherein the predetermined application determination information is subject to the application determination by the application determination means. To set an effect (holding notice) to be performed at a timing earlier than
The first effect executing means is configured to make the predetermined grant determination information that is the specific target the target of the grant determination based on the fact that the specific result by the destination specifying means is a predetermined result. A special notice (holding notice) corresponding to the result of the grant determination in the case of the predetermined notice at a timing earlier than the result of the grant judgment for the predetermined special information or separate from the predetermined notice means. Which is executed by the notification means,
The second effect executing means, based on the fact that the contents of the special notification executed by the first effect executing means are predetermined contents (for example, contents corresponding to the fourth hold image P4). The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics K1 to K23, wherein the effect is executed by the predetermined notifying unit or a different notifying unit.

  According to the above configuration, there is a possibility that the special notification is given to the predetermined grant determination information stored in the acquired information storage means before it is subject to grant determination. As a result, it is possible to play a game in which the predetermined grant determination information that has been identified by the first identifying means is predicted before the result of the grant determination of the predetermined grant determination information is notified. As a result, diversification of games is achieved. Therefore, the attention degree of the game can be increased. When performing such special notification, if it is a special notification that makes it easy for the player to be given the first privilege, the degree of attention to the special notification is increased, while the production of the other information for determination of grant is performed. May reduce the degree of attention. Moreover, if it is a special alert | report which makes it difficult to give a 1st privilege, not only the special alert | report but the attention degree to the subsequent production may fall extremely. Therefore, for example, when a predetermined content is set as the special notification, the degree of attention may be reduced by performing the special notification if the second notification is performed by the predetermined notification unit or a different notification unit. In the situation, it is possible to pay attention to the second performance side, and it is possible to suitably avoid a reduction in the degree of attention.

Feature K25. The first effect executing means starts the game turning operation by the predetermined notifying means based on the grant determination by the grant determining means, and as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. It is provided with game time control means (function to execute a game time control process by the main control device 81) that causes the game time operation to be performed once to end the game time operation,
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game replay operation is performed over the operation period,
The destination specifying means uses the information on the operation period set by the operation period setting means as a timing before the game times to be set by the operation period setting means are executed by the game time control means. A pre-operation period specifying means (function for executing the effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82),
The game machine according to claim K24, wherein the second condition setting means sets the special condition based on a specification result by the previous operation period specifying means.

  According to the said structure, in the 2nd production performed based on the content of the special alert | report being the predetermined content, the special condition is set based on the information of an operation period. Thereby, the special alerting | reporting performed based on the information for predetermined | prescribed provision determination, and the information of an operation period can be linked | related.

  In this case, the notification regarding the predetermined grant determination information is performed for the special notification, and the special condition in the second effect executed based on the special notification is based on an operation period other than the predetermined grant determination information. May be set, or may be set based on an operation period of predetermined grant determination information. In the former case, it is possible to increase the degree of attention with respect to the other information for determination of assignment by the second effect while increasing the degree of attention with respect to the predetermined information for determination of provision with special notification. In the latter case, the special notification and the second effect can be more closely associated. For example, when the special notification is performed to suggest that the first privilege is difficult to be given, the special effect is used in the second effect. It is possible to diversify the production by, for example, a configuration in which the production is easy to satisfy the condition.

  Feature K26. The second condition setting means, in the special notification that triggered the execution of the second effect by the second effect execution means, before the predetermined grant determination information that is the target of the special notification. The gaming machine according to Feature K25, wherein the special condition is set based on the operation period specified by the previous operation period specifying means for the information for determination of grant that is a target of grant determination. .

  According to the above configuration, since the special condition is set based on the operation period of the grant determination information that is the target of the grant determination before the grant determination information that is the target of the special alert, It is possible to increase the interest in the operation period of the game times for the information for grant determination that is the target of the grant determination before the information for grant determination, and to the effect for other game times by performing a special notification It becomes possible to avoid a reduction in the degree of attention.

Feature K27. The first effect executing means starts the game turning operation by the predetermined notifying means based on the grant determination by the grant determining means, and as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. It is provided with game time control means (function to execute a game time control process by the main control device 81) that causes the game time operation to be performed once to end the game time operation,
The game turn operation by the game turn control means includes the first action (reach occurrence) and the first action before the first action at a timing prior to notifying the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means. The branch timing for branching to the second action (reach non-occurrence) where the grant probability of one privilege is low is set (high-speed fluctuation end timing of the lower symbol sequence Z3),
The determination means determines whether or not the special condition is successful at the branch timing in the game rotation operation for the grant determination information for which the grant determination is performed in a situation where the second effect is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K26, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, the success or failure of the special condition is determined at the branch timing between the first operation and the second operation. Further, at this branch timing, the probability that the first privilege is granted is increased if the gaming operation is branched to the first operation, while the grant probability is lowered if the game is branched to the second operation. In this case, it may be possible to further add a branch effect associated with the level of the grant probability for the first benefit, but if the effect is too complicated, there is a concern that the player's understanding will be reduced. It is possible that interest will fade. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the special condition different from the first privilege is determined at this branch timing, it is possible to suitably execute a plurality of branch effects related to the privilege grant while suppressing the complexity of the game.

  Feature K28. Special setting means capable of making the elapsed speed of the period corresponding to the special condition set by the condition setting means different from the elapsed speed so far or making the remaining period of the period different from the remaining period so far. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K27, further comprising (a function of executing a subtraction value adjustment process by the effect control device 82).

  According to the above configuration, the probability of establishment of the special condition changes as the elapsed speed or the remaining period of the period corresponding to the special condition changes. Thus, for example, even if the special condition is not likely to be satisfied, the special condition can be satisfied by changing the elapsed speed or the remaining period, and for example, the special condition is likely to be satisfied. Even so, it is possible to prevent the special condition from being satisfied by changing the elapsed speed or the remaining period. That is, the success / failure process of the special condition can be varied, and the degree of attention to the second effect can be suitably increased.

  Note that the condition setting means in this configuration can be applied to both the first condition setting means and the second condition setting means, or the above-described effects can be obtained even if only one of them is applied.

Feature K29. The first effect execution means starts the game turning operation by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, and the result of the grant determination As a notification result corresponding to, the game turn operation is terminated as one game time, and the game turn control means (the game control process by the main control device 81 is executed). Function)
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game replay operation is performed over the operation period,
The game machine according to claim K28, wherein the special setting means is configured to change the special setting means according to the operation period set by the operation period setting means.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to further increase the relevance of the establishment probability of the special condition with the operation period, and it is possible to suitably avoid inconveniences based on the length of the operation period of game times.

Feature K30. The special condition is set such that the probability of establishment increases as the period during which the second performance is performed elapses,
The game machine according to Feature K29, wherein the special setting means is configured to increase the elapsed speed to be varied or to shorten the remaining period to be varied as the operation period is shorter.

  According to the above configuration, when the operation period is short, the period during which the predetermined set period elapses is also shortened, so that the probability of establishment of the special condition can be lowered. Therefore, in such a case, by changing the speed so that the elapsed speed is increased or the remaining period is shortened, it is possible to prevent the interest from diminishing by predicting that the special condition is not satisfied due to the short operation period. Is possible.

Feature K31. Information acquisition means (operation by the main control device 81) for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, a game ball entering the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34) Means for performing a winning process for oral use)
Based on the information for grant determination acquired by the information acquisition means, grant determination means (mainly) for determining whether to give a player a first privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode) A function of executing the determination processing by the control device 81),
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first effect setting means for setting a first effect to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) (function of executing a game time control process by the main control device 81). )When,
First effect execution means (function for executing variable display control processing by the effect control device 82) for executing the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first privilege granting means (function to execute a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second effect executing means (a function for executing a special hold advance notice setting process by the effect control device 82) capable of executing a second effect (special hold advance notice) by the predetermined informing means or a different informing means;
Condition setting means (a function for executing special hold advance notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) for setting a special condition that may vary depending on the length of the period during which the second effect is performed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the grant determination information is acquired based on the acquisition condition being satisfied, and the grant determination is performed based on the grant determination information to determine whether or not the first privilege is granted. In a gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the determination, the second notification is performed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established. Production is performed. Therefore, in addition to the first effect performed based on the determination of grant, the second effect is performed, thereby diversifying the effects.

  Here, the first privilege is granted according to the result of the grant determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a first effect (for example, an effect for game times) is performed by a predetermined notification unit based on the grant determination. On the other hand, if the first effect based on this grant determination continues for a long time, it can be expected that the first privilege may be obtained. On the other hand, for example, whether or not the first privilege is obtained. For a player who is only paying attention, or a player who knows the result of the determination of grant to some extent for some reason (for example, presence / absence or strength of a notice effect), the first effect performed by a predetermined notification means is performed. If it continues for a long time, it may feel redundant. On the other hand, if the first effect based on the grant determination is short, the inconvenience as described above can be avoided, but the effect of sufficiently enjoying the first effect is reduced. That is, the longer the length of the first effect on the assignment determination side is, the better, and it can be said that inconvenience may occur even if the length is short.

  Therefore, as in this configuration, if a means for setting a special condition that can vary the establishment probability depending on the length of the period during which the second effect is performed, a measure such as a simple length of the first effect on the assignment determination side. It is possible to have a different scale, and even if the above-mentioned inconvenience may occur in the first presentation on the grant determination side, it is expected that special conditions will be easily established. It is possible to maintain a good balance of attention to the game. Note that “depending on the length of the period” can be rephrased as “in relation to the length of the period” or “depending on the length of the period”.

Feature K32. Information acquisition means (operation by the main control device 81) for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, a game ball entering the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34) Means for performing a winning process for oral use)
Based on the information for grant determination acquired by the information acquisition means, grant determination means (mainly) for determining whether to give a player a first privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode) A function of executing the determination processing by the control device 81),
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first effect setting means for setting a first effect to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) (function of executing a game time control process by the main control device 81). )When,
First effect execution means (function for executing variable display control processing by the effect control device 82) for executing the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first privilege granting means (function to execute a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Second effect execution means (special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) capable of executing a second effect (special hold notice) different from the first effect by the predetermined notifying means or another notifying means. Function to execute)
Second condition setting means for setting a special condition whose probability of establishment may vary depending on the length of the period during which the second effect is performed based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied (time specifying pattern by the effect control device 82) Game machine having a function of executing timer input processing at the time).

  According to the above configuration, the grant determination information is acquired based on the acquisition condition being satisfied, and the grant determination is performed based on the grant determination information to determine whether or not the first privilege is granted. In a gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the determination, the second notification is performed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established. Production is performed. Therefore, in addition to the first effect performed based on the determination of grant, the second effect is performed, thereby diversifying the effects.

  Here, the first privilege is granted according to the result of the grant determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a first effect (for example, an effect for game times) is performed by a predetermined notification unit based on the grant determination. On the other hand, if the first effect based on this grant determination continues for a long time, it can be expected that the first privilege may be obtained. On the other hand, for example, whether or not the first privilege is obtained. For a player who is only paying attention, or a player who knows the result of the determination of grant to some extent for some reason (for example, presence / absence or strength of a notice effect), the first effect performed by a predetermined notification means is performed. If it continues for a long time, it may feel redundant. On the other hand, if the first effect based on the grant determination is short, the inconvenience as described above can be avoided, but the effect of sufficiently enjoying the first effect is reduced. That is, the longer the length of the first effect on the assignment determination side is, the better, and it can be said that inconvenience may occur even if the length is short.

  Therefore, as in the present configuration, there is provided second condition setting means for setting a special condition whose probability of establishment differs depending on the length of the period during which the second effect is performed, based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied. If this is the case, it is possible to have a scale different from the simple scale of the first performance on the grant determination side, and the above-mentioned inconvenience may occur in the first performance on the grant determination side. Even in such a case, it can be expected that the special condition is easily established.

  In particular, since the special condition set by the second condition setting means is set based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied, for example, the gaming machine side determines whether the special condition is satisfied according to the gaming situation. It can be managed to some extent. Specifically, if the special condition is to be established for production or the special condition should not be established, if the special condition is set based on that, the special condition A sense of incongruity in the production based on success or failure can be eliminated, and in this way, the production as designed can be suitably executed. Note that “depending on the length of the period” can be rephrased as “in relation to the length of the period” or “depending on the length of the period”.

  When the characteristic configurations described in the features K1 to K30 are applied to the feature K31 or the feature 32, the effects of the applied characteristic configuration can be synergistically achieved.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of multiple symbols in a variably displayed state, and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. The special game state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating means or when the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A throwing device that performs a throwing process for taking in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray, A gaming machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is made effective when a game ball is inserted by.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 33 ... Upper operation port, 34 ... Lower operation port, 41 ... Symbol display device, 54 ... Launch handle, 63 ... Display light emission part, 75 ... Operation part, 81 ... Main control device, 82 ... Production control device .

Claims (12)

Information acquisition means for acquiring information for grant determination based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Based on the information for determination of grant acquired by the information acquisition means, grant determination means for determining whether to grant the player a first privilege;
A first effect setting means for setting a first effect performed by a predetermined notification means based on the grant determination by the grant determination means;
First effect execution means for executing the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
A first privilege granting unit for granting the first privilege based on the grant determination by the grant determination unit;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means;
Condition setting means for setting a special condition in which the establishment probability may vary depending on the length of the period during which the second effect is performed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: The condition setting means includes first condition setting means for setting the special condition without taking into account that the special condition is satisfied,
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a determining unit that determines whether or not the special condition is satisfied after the special condition is set by the condition setting unit.   The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the condition setting unit includes a second condition setting unit that sets the special condition based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied. Comprising grasping means for grasping the information for grant determination or the special information set based on the information for grant determination;
The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the second condition setting means sets the special condition based on information grasped by the grasping means.   The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the second condition setting means includes means for setting the special condition so that the special condition is satisfied.   5. The apparatus according to claim 2, wherein the determination unit includes a unit that determines whether the special condition is successful regardless of a result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit at the time of determination. The gaming machine described.   The system further comprises second privilege granting means for granting a player a second privilege different from the first privilege based on the determination that the special condition is established. Item 7. A gaming machine according to any one of Items 2 to 6.   The said condition setting means sets the said special condition so that the said special condition becomes easy to be satisfied, so that the period when the said 2nd production is performed is long, The any one of Claim 1 thru | or 7 characterized by the above-mentioned. The gaming machine described in 1. The first effect executing means starts the game turning operation by the predetermined notifying means based on the grant determination by the grant determining means, and as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. A game time control means for causing the game time operation to be performed once and to end the game time operation is provided,
The game turn control means includes operation period setting means for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and the game turn operation is performed over the operation period set by the operation period setting means. Is,
9. The condition setting unit according to claim 1, further comprising a unit that sets the special condition based on a length of the operation period set by the operation period setting unit. The gaming machine described.   The gaming machine according to claim 2, further comprising a destination notification unit that performs notification of the special condition at a timing earlier than the determination by the determination unit.   11. The gaming machine according to claim 2, further comprising a post-notification unit that performs notification of the special condition at a timing after the determination by the determination unit. An acquisition information storage means for storing the grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number that is a predetermined number;
The grant determination means sequentially performs the grant determination on the grant determination information stored in the acquisition information storage means,
A destination specifying unit that specifies information about the predetermined grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit at a timing earlier than the predetermined grant determination information is the target of the grant determination;
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the condition setting means sets the special condition based on a specification result by the destination specifying means.

Images